Chevrolet - CK Pickup - Owners Manual - 1997 - 1997

The 1997 Chevrolet C/K Pickup Owner’s Manual 1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR’ system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to stan and 0perat.e your vehicle. 3-1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfortcontrols and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips aboutthe road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells what todo if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and lookinggood. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and whatfluids and lubricants to use. 8-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting SafetyDefects” on page 8- 10. 9- 1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. i We support voluntary technician certification. GENERAL MOTORS, GM,the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET and the CHEVROLET Emblem are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Division whenever it appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your vehicle,so it will be there if you ever need it when you’reon the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leavethis manual in it so the new owner can use it. WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATIONTHROUGH National institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a French Language Manual: Aux propri6taires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7 Litho in U.S.A. C9704 B First Edition ii @CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Safety Warnings and Symbols Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things thatcould hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. I I A CAUTION: These mean thereis something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please readthese cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. iii You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,’’ “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.” In the notice area, we tellyou about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, thisdamage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tellyou what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in thisbook you will find these notices: I NOTICE: These mean thereis something that could damage your vehicle. iv Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING A Q These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: These symbols have to do with your lamps: These symbols are on some of your controls: These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: WINDSHIELD WIPER COOLANT TEMP DOOR LOCK UNLOCK BAllERY CHARGING SYSTEM CAUSTIC WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER FASTEN SEAT BELTS BRAKE BURNS COOLANT a POWER WINDOW SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BAllERY ,\I/, . DAYTIME RUNNING ' LAMPS FOG LAMPS 0 $0 WINDOW DEFOGGER ENGINE OIL PRESSURE VENTILATING FAN ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Here are some other symbols you may see: I-1 FUSE LIGHTER (a) a HORN SPEAKER e, FUEL n b b la (@) V Model Reference This manual covers these models: Regular Cab Pickup u Extended Cab Pickup vi I Crew Cab I : Chassis Cab 3500 HD Chassis Cab Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts. 1-2 1-9 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-22 1-23 1-23 1-32 Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts: They’re forEveryone Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts - - and the Answers How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Right Front Passenger Position Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System Center Passenger Position 1-34 1-40 1-43 1-45 1-62 1-65 1-65 1-65 Rear Seat Passengers Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Smaller Adults Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints. If your vehiclehas a manual bucket, split benchor full bench seat, you can adjust it with this lever at the front of the seat. Manual Front Seat I U You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you don’t wantto. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle isnot moving. 1-2 Slide the lever at thefront of the seat towardthe passenger’s side to unlock it. Using yourbody, slide the seat to where you want it. Then, release the lever and try to move the seat withyour body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place. Power Driver’s Seat (Option) You can use the round center knob to move the seat to where vou want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up. To lower the seat, move the knob down. To move the 4 seat forward, move the knob toward thefront of the vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the knob toward the rearof the vehicle. You can also raise and lower thefront and rear of the seat. To raise the front of the seat, movk the front lever up. To lower the front of the seat, move the front lever down. To raise the rear of the seat, move the rear lever up. To lower the rear of the seat, move the rear lever down. If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s side, you can adjust it with these controls at the outside edge of the seat. 1-3 Power Lumbar Control Reclining Seatbacks If you have power lu.mbar adjustment, you can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback. To increase support, press and hold the frontof the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support. To decrease support, press and hold the rearof the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired levelof support. 1-4 To adjust the frontseatback, move the lever rearward. Release the leverto lock the seatback whereyou want it. Move the lever again rearwardand the seatback willgo to an upright position. .. . ., ',' 'I' , ';" , Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle,i s in motion can be dangerous. Evenif you buckle up, your safety belts can't do their job when you're reclined this. like _. The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash you could go into it, . receiving neckor otherinjuries. The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashae belt could go up over your abdomen. The be!t forces would bethere, not at your pelvic,bqnes, , ,. This could cause serious internal injuries. . For proper protection when the vehicle is in . . motion, havethe seatback upright. Then sit . , well back in the seat and wear your safety _ . . .. :. .. . .. . belt properly. , '' I ' . ,\ , ' & L 'I I But don't have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. - , ', ' ; , ,.' , % I . . -. . I . . , ~. .. ' ' . ; .. . . . 1-5 Head Restraints Slide the headrestraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury ina crash. To fold a front split bench or bucket seatbackforward, pull this lever forward and fold the seatback forward. Seatback Latches The front seatback of the base level bench seatfolds forward to let you access the rearof the cab. Your seatback will move back andforth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then it will lock into place. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to fold forward. Access to the rear of the cab is available by using therear doors. The front seatback of split bench seat and bucket seats fold forward to let you access the rear ofthe cab. To return the seatback to the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until itlatches. After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward to make sure itis locked. The rear seatback of a rear bench seat withouta center armrest can be folded forwardto let you reach the area behind it. Your seatback will move back and forth freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then, it will lock into place. The Crew Cab rear seatback with a center armrest folds forward to let you accessthe area behind it. To fold a seatback forward, pull this lever forward and fold the seatback forward. To return the seatback to the upright position, just push the seatback rearward until itlatches. After returning the seatback to its uprightposition, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. A -CAUTION: I Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only) The manual driver and passengerfront bucket seat and the manual 60/40 split bench seat of your vehicle have an easy entry feature. This makes it easyto get in and out of the rear seat. On vehicles with the power driver's seat, only the front passenger's seat has the easy entry feature. To operate the seat, pull forward on the top of this lever and tilt the back forward toward the front of the vehicle. - If the seatback isn't locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearwardon the seatback to be sure it is locked. When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or push the seat forward until it stops. 1-7 Rear Seat (Extended Cab) Folding the Retar Seat The extended cab may have a rear folding seat which can be folded open for more seating space. To use the seat: 1. Pull the entire seat forward until it isflat. 2. Then pull forward on the RELEASE lever under the seat cushion, on the passenger's side of the rear seat. Push the seatback rearward until it latches. 3. After pushing the seatback upright into position, pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked. 1-8 The extended cab’s rear seat can also be folded up to provide more cargo space. To fold the seat: I . Pull forward on the RELEASE lever at the side of the seat cushion, behind the passenger’s side front seat. Fold the seatback forward until it latches with the seat cushion. 2. Lift the entire seat and push it rearward into place. 3. Make sure the seat is secure. Rear Seat (Crew Cab) Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint system, or air t ; system. A-CAUTION: Don’t let anyone rid, where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured orkilled. In the same crash,you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properlytoo. You can adjust the seat by sliding the lever at the front of the seat toward the seat support to unlock it. Then, slide the seat to where you want it. Release the lever and try to move the seat with your body in order to make sure the seat is locked into place. 1-9 -- A CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride in :argo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckleup can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! 1-10 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. Put someone on it. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on wheels. 1-11 I Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop. 1-12 The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... or the instrument panel ... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make suchgood sense. 1-13 Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask About Safety Belts-- and the Answers Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident ifI’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But youcan unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has air bags,why should I have to wear safety belts? At Air bags are in manyvehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not onlyin frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 1-14 &.’ If I’m a good driver, andI never drivefar from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and a good driver your passengers can be hurt. Being doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts arefor everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s howto wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plateto make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-15 I I The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move Serious Or even f a d injuries. The shoulder belt should go the height adjuster to the desired position. YOUcan move over the shoulder and across the chest. These partsof the the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt body are best able to take belt restraining forces. guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing to inmake sure it The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash. has locked into position. 1-16 Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. &.’ What’s wrong with this? A: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-17 e." What's wrong with this? /1\ CC 'JTIOPT: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, notat the pelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-18 What’s wrong withthis? You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high.In a crash, you can slideunder thebelt. The belt force wouldthen be appliedat the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and thatcould cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. A: The belt is over an armrest. What’s wrong withthis? You can be seriouslyinjured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would movetoo far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severelyinjure internalorgans like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-20 e." What's wrong with this? You can be seriously injuredby a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-21 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work foreveryone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, theyare more likely to be seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts. To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, besure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion shouldbe worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 1-22 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint system or air bag system. Right Front Passenger Position Your vehicle may have an The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in this section. air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger. If it does, it will say Supplemental Inflatable Restraint on the middle part of the steering wheel. When the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. (This is the child restraint locking feature working normally.) If the belt locks, let it go back all the way and start again. 1-23 Here are the most important things toknow about the air bag system: You can be severelyinjured orkilled ina crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints’’to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts,but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work onlyin moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehiclehits something. Theyaren’t designed toinflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly whether or not there’s an air bag for thatperson. -- ~ I An inflating air bag can seriouslyinjure small children. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, seethe part of this manual called Vhildren” and the caution label onthe right front passenger’s safety belt. -- I 1-24 Air bagsinflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep youin position beforeand during a crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even with air bags. The driver should sitas far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. I AIR BAG There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. How the Air Bag System Works The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information. Where are theair bags? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-25 I A CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might forcethe object into that person. Thepath of an inflating air bag mustbe kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. 1-26 When should an air bag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash. The airbag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform,the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See “Off-Road Driving” in the Indexfor more tips on off-road driving. What makes an air bag inflate? In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel andin the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. 1-27 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact moreevenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not helpyou in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion isnot toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more thana supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after anair bag inflates? After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Somecomponents of the air bag module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panelfor the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot fora short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it stop people from leaving the vehicle. A CAUTION: When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as isit safe todo so. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or door. In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag. Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Unless you have a Crew Cab, your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the passenger’s air bag. But use this switch only when you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint at the rightfront passenger’s position. See “Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. [I A CAUTION: ~ If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off, an adult or child a whois no longer an infant sitting in the right front passenger’s position won’t have the extra protectionof an airbag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Make sure the air bag is turned on unless you are using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. 1-29 0 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improperservice can mean that your See your dealer air bag system won’t work properly. for service. NOTICE: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may haveto replace the air bag module inthe steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the passenger’s air bag. Do not openor break the air bag coverings. Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle.You don’t wantthe system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your GM dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual,see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. I For upto 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air bag can stillinflate during improper service. You can beinjured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped withyellow tape or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the air bag system.Be sure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure theperson performing work for you is qualified to doso. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-30 Adding Equipment toYour Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle @ What if I add a snow plow? Willit keep the air bags from working properly? @ If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle,will it keep the air bags from working properly? A: A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash. We’ve designed our air bag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including snow plowing with vehicles equipped with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But don’t change or defeat the snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle, and it maycause an air bag inflation. Is there anythingI might addto the frontof the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or height, they may keep the air bag system from working properly. Also, the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Twoof the Customer Satisfaction Procedurein this manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure”in the Index.) 1-31 E Center Passenger Position ~ Lap Belt ~ If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center positions. 1-32 Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) L Front (All) When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) 1-33 Rear Seat Passengers It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show thatunbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’tsafety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab) Front (All) To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “SafetyBelt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-34 If you have a Crew Cab, see “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Crew Cab)” later in this section. 1 Lap-Shoulder Belt (ExtendedCab) The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s howto wear one properly. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you canbuckle it. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snugon the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause _ _ serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. . The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stopor a crash. 1-36 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Crew Cab) You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose.In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. If you have an ExtendedCab, see “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab)” earlier in this section. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-37 Lap-Shoulder Belt (Crew Cab) The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at theend of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t letit get twisted. 1-38 be less force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'd likely to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksonly if there's a sudden stop or a crash. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 1-39 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults If your vehicle has a rear seat, your vehicle may have shoulder belt comfort guides.This feature will provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints andfor small adults. When installed on a shoulderbelt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safetybelt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s howto install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. 1-40 1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of the seatback. 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1-41 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted andit lies flat. The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top. 1-42 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab)” or “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (Crew Cab)” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Slide the guide ontothe storage clip. Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the belt before you fold a rear seat down or use an easy-entry seat, if your vehicle has one. Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children andBabies I 1A C! ‘JTION: Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bonesare so small that a regular belt mightnot stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enoughfor one is alwaysproperly restrained in a child or infant restraint. 1-43 I at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly becomea 240-lb. (110 kg) force on yourarms. The babywould be almost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in an infant restraint. Never hold a baby in yourarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a crash. During acrash a babywill becomeso heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash CAUTION: (Continued) -- 1-44 Child Restraints Be sure the child restraint isdesigned to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the beltsystem in your vehicle, but the childalso has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infantor child restraint will show you how to do that. Where to Put the Restraint (Except Extended Cab and Crew Cab) The child restraint must be secured properly in the center or right front passenger seat. If your vehicle has air bags and you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger’s seat, you need to turn off the passenger’s air bag. See “Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Be sureto turn off the air bag before using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Besure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. 1-45 Where to Put the Restraint (Extended Cab andCrew Cab) Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We at General Motors therefore recommend thatyou put your child restraint in the rear seat, if your vehicle hasone. If you have a Crew Cab, never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here’s why: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injuredif the right front passenger’s air baginflates. This is becausethe back of a rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflatingair bag. If you have a Crew Cab, always securea rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. CAUTION: (Continued) 1-46 CAUTIOP ’Continued) You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Before you secure a forward-facingchild restraint, alwaysmove the far back as it will go. Or, front passenger seat as secure the child restraint in the rear seat. If you have an ExtendedCab, your vehicle hasa switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the passenger’s air bag. But use this switch only when you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint at the right front passenger’s position.See “Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position”in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. Top Strap A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating air bag. Be sure toturn off the air bag before using arear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. .~ If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it. 1-47 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab) 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-48 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder or portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through around the restraint.The child restraint instructions will show you how. Tilt the latch plateto adjust the beltif needed. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’sface or neck, Put it behind the child restraint. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push downon the child restraint. Make sure the buckle endof the belt is pulled out all the way. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-49 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab) lap and shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the or around portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show of the you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front child’s faceor neck, put it behind the child restraint. If you havean Extended Cab, see “Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab)” earlier in this section. You’ll be using the lap-shoulderbelt. See the earlier part about thetop strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraintas the instructions say. 1-50 4. Buckle the belt. Makesure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed thelap belt back into the retractor while youpush down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freelyagain and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-51 Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat Position You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier part about thetop strap if the child restraint has one. 1-52 Rear (Extended and Crew Cab) 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Front (All) 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. Rear (Extended and CrewCab) 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-53 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker for their advice about howto attach the child restraint properly. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It willbe ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Crew Cab) Front (All) 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, pull itsfree end while you push down on the child restraint. 1-54 Your vehicle has a rightfront passenger air bag. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: A CAUTION: - A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. Thisis because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. 4. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’sface or neck, put it behind thechild restraint. You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint hasone. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 1-55 6 . Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set thelock. 7. To tighten the belt,feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 8. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt andlet it goback all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-56 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Except CrewCab) If your vehicle has air bags, there is a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s air bag. But use this switch only when you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint at the right front passenger’s position. I A CAUTION: I A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. CAUTION: (Continued) 1-57 Be sure to turn off the air bag before using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert your ignition key into the switch, pushin, and move the switch to AIR BAG OFF. The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger’sair bag is off. The right front passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it Jack o n again, and theAIR BAG OFF light will stay on :o remind you that the air bag is off. A CAUTION: If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the air bag, it means that something maybe wrong with theair bagsystem. The right frontpassenger’s air bagcould inflate even though the switchis off. If this ever happens, don’t secure a rear-facing child restraint in your vehicle until you have your vehicle serviced. 1-58 I You’il be usingthe lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. If your vehicle has air bags and youare using a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure the air bag is turned off. If your child restraint is forward-facing, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this seat. (See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder belt goes infront of the child’sface or neck, put it behind the child restraint. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. 1-59 - ' 6. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 7. To tighten the belt, feed thelap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 8. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt andlet it go back all theway. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-60 If your vehicle has air bags, turn on the right front passenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facing child restraint. A CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off, an adult or a child who is no longer an infant sitting in the right front passenger’s position won’t have the extraprotection of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t beable to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Make sure the air bag isturned on unlessyou are using a rearfacing child restraint in the right front seat position. To turn the air bag on again, insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the ON position. 1-61 Larger Children If you havethe choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rearseat. But they needto use the safety belts properly. Children who have outgrownchild restraints should wear the vehicle's safety belts. 1-62 0 Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. 0 Children who aren't buckled up can strike other people who are. I Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’tproperly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time. What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very closeto the child’s faceor neck? A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might wantto place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one. 1-63 Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would then beapplied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones ina crash. 1-64 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt willfasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’sfree. When you go in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is madeto fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then, make sure the safety beltreminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keepa safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts werestretched, as they would beif worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repairedor replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section. Torn or frayed safety belts maynot protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-65 $@% NOTES 1-66 Section 2 FeaturesandControls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument paneland the warning systems that tell youif everything is working properly -- and what to doif you have a problem. 2- 1 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-7 2-9 2- 10 2-11 2- 13 2- 14 2- 15 2- 19 2-22 2-22 2-27 2-28 2-30 Keys Tailgate Third Door Door Locks Keyless Entry System Theft New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions Starting Your Gasoline Engine Engine Coolant Heater Automatic Transmission Operation Manual Transmission Operation Locking Rear Axle Four-wheel Drive Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) Shifting Out of PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-36 2-36 2-43 2-48 2-52 2-59 2-6 1 2-62 2-64 2-66 Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) Windows Tilt Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Sun Visors Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators 2-1 Keys I ~~~ A CAUTION: Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't leave the keys in a vehicle with young children. 2-2 I Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition and all door locks. Tailgate You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. To shut the tailgate, firmly push it away from you into the latch. After you put thetailgate back up, pullit back toward you, to be sure that it latches securely. Tailgate Removal [f you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to tssist you withobtaining new ones. The tailgate on your vehicle canbe removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate canbe removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible finish darnage. NOTICE: Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to getin. So be sure you havean extra key. - 2-3 Third Door (If Equipped) To remove the tailgate: 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. To release the cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight out and push the cable clips forward. 2. With the tailgate at a slight upward angle, pull back on the tailgate at the right edge and then move the tailgateto the right to release the left edge. Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure the tailgate is secure. 2-4 Your vehicle may be equipped witha third door that an extended cab. allows easier access to the rear area of To open the third door, first open the passenger’s side front door.Then, use the handle located on the front edge of the rear doorto open it. You must close and latch the third door beforeyou can close the front passenger door. To lock the door from the inside, slide the lever on your door down. Door Locks Unlocked doors can be c Igerous. Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it. Outsiders caneasily enter throughan unlocked door whenyou slow down or stop yourvehicle. so obvious: You increase the This may not be chance of being thrown outof the vehicle ina crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safetybel properly, lock your doors,and you will be far better off whenever you drive yourvehicle. -- -- To unlock the door, slide thelever up. There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehic From the outside, use your key or the Keyless Entry System, if your vehicle hasthis option. 2-5 Power Door Locks (If Equipped) Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) Press the bottomof the power door lockswitch, marked LOCK, on either front door to lock all the doors at once. Press the ribbed side of the switchto unlock all thedoors at once. With this feature, you can lock the rear doorsso they can’t be openedfrom the inside by the passengers. Move the leverup to engage the securityfeature. Move the lever down to return the door locks to normal operation. Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. 2-6 Keyless Entry System(If Equipped) If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this: In addition, your interior lamps will be illuminatedfor a set period of time when the transmitter signal is received by the Keyless Entry System. Check to determine if battery replacement or transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow. Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada. Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking thesignal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold thetransmitter higher, and try again. This devicecomplies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. If you’re still having trouble, see your GM dealer or a qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 2-7 Operation Battery Replacement To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years. If you pressthis button again withinfive seconds, all the remaining doors (except the thirddoor) will unlock. The interior lamps willcome on for 40 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Press the LOCK button to lock all thedoors (except the third door). The interior lamps will come on for two seconds as soon as all thedoors are closed. Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is codedto prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also bematched. Once your dealer has codedthe new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it. 2-8 You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably timeto change the battery. I NOTICE: When replacing the battery, use care notto touch body any of the circuitry. Static from your transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. Use one three volt, typeCR2032, or equivalent battery. To replace the battery: Synchronization Synchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording andplaying back the signal from the transmitter. To resynchronize your transmitter, standclose to your vehicle and simultaneously press and hold theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least five seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your dealer for service. Theft 1. Insert a small coin, or flathead screwdriver, to separate the bottom of thetransmitter from the top. 2. Remove the battery and replace it witha new one, making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is facing down. Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we puton it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. 3. Snap the top and bottom together. 4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver. 2-9 l Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle withthe keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don’t do it. When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone reminding you toremove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Alwaysdo this. Your steering wheel will belocked, and so will your -0 mition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key outalso locks your transmission. And remember to lockthe doors. Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot,close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them ina storage area, or take them with you. Parking Lots If you park ina lot wheresomeone will be watching your vehicle, it’s bestto lock it up and take your keys. But whatif you have toleave your ignition key? Whatif you have toleave something valuablein your vehicle? 0 Put your valuables ina storage area, like your glove box. 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s. 1 2-10 New Vehicle “Break-In” NOTICE: Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you followthese guidelines: 0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). 0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322km)or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get newbrake linings. 0 Don’t towa trailer during break-in. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information. -- -- LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering Ignition Positions You can use your keyto turn your ignition switch to five different positions. I C wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able toremove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK. OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while theengine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed). RUN (D): This is the position for driving. START (E): This starts your engine. A E ACCESSORY (A):ACCESSORY lets you use things like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. Push inthe key and turn it towards you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key. IA CAUT’DN: On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turnthe engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving. 2-11 NOTICE: If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can't turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel leftand rightwhile youturn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch.If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. Key Release Button The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition of manual transmission vehicles unlessthe key release button is used. To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles, turn the key toOFF, then press the button and turn the key to LOCK. Do not holdthe button in while turning the key to OFF'. Keeping your finger on the button, pull the key straight out. On automatic transmissionvehicles, turn the key to LOCK and puII it straight out. 2-12 Starting Your Gasoline Engine Manual Transmission If you have a diesel engine, see“Starting Your Diesel Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. Automatic Transmission The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL(N). Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is notall the way down -- that’s a safety feature. Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)if your vehicle is moving.If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a timewill cause yourbattery tobe drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can damage yourstarter motor. 2-13 2. If it doesn’tstart right away, hold your key in START.If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedalall the way downfor five more seconds, or until it starts. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal. Engine Coolant Heater (Option) In verycold weather, 0°F (- 18O C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. NOTICE: Your engineis designed to work withthe electronics inyour vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical If you don’t, equipment, check with your dealer. your engine might notperform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells howto do it without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index. 2-14 You’ll get easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. To Use the Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. J: How long should youkeep the coolant heater plugged in? Theanswer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that youcontact your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you thebest advice for that particular area. Automatic Transmission Operation k Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet Also, the wrong could cause an electrical shock. kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep away it from moving engine parts.If you don’t, it couldbe damaged. There are several different positions for your shift lever. If your vehicle is equipped withan automatic transmission, it now features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster.This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is inOFF, rather than LOCK, there willbe a small current drainon your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time.If you have to leave your keyin the ignition in OFF for an extended period,it is recommended to that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery prevent discharging your battery. PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when youstart your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. A CAUTILJ: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the (P) with the shift lever is not fully PARK in parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. CAUTION: (Continued) 2-16 Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have leftthe engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free toroll even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) if your transfer caseis in NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheel high(2H) or four-wheel high (4H) o r four-wheel low (4L) not in NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. -- -- -- REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. I NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift toREVERSE (R)only after your vehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging your transmission, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. Shifting out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is“racing” (running at high speed)is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmlyon the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could losecontrol and hitpeople or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. NOTICE: Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine racing isn’t covered byyour warranty. 2-17 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need morepower for passing, and you’re: Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle froma stop on slippery road surfaces. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on verysteep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shiftinto first gear until the vehicleis going slowly enough. You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road driving. You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often. THIRD (3):This position is also used for normal driving, however it offersmore power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@). SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use your brakes off andon. If you manually selectSECOND (2), the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing 2-18 NOTICE: If your rear wheelscan’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. Manual Transmission Operation 5-Speed (MW3 Transmission with Low Gear) (If Equipped) Here’s how to operate your transmission: only when the vehicle speed is below5 mph (8 km/h). If you try to shift down into FIRST (1) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the FIRST (1) position until vehicle speed isreduced. SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into SECOND (2) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come toa complete stop and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch.Press the (2). clutch pedal back down. Then shift into SECOND If you try to downshift into SECOND( 2 ) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the SECOND ( 2 ) position until vehicle speed is reduced. FIRST (1) is intended only for heavy loads and is not recommended for normal driving. During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start your vehicle moving in FIRST (1). This allows clutch components to break-in properly. FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into FIRST (1) THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into THIRD ( 3 ) .Then, slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal. FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into the higher forward gears the same way you do for THIRD (3). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal. 2-19 To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL (N). NEUTRAL (N):Use this position when you start or idle your engine. REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Waitabout five seconds for the internal partsto stop spinning and then shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedalslowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis stopped. Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. 5-Speed (MG5/M50 Transmissions Without Low Gear) (If Equipped) Here’s how to operate your transmission: FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedaland shift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let upon the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into FIRST (1). SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal asyou let up on the accelerator pedaland shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let upon the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal. THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way I I you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle, To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the to clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift NEUTRAL (N). 2-20 ~ NEUTRAL (N):Use this position when you startor idle your engine. REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down theclutch pedal. Wait about five seconds for the internal parts to stop spinning and then, shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. NOTICE: Shift to REVERSE(R)only after your vehicleis stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. Shift Speeds I c If' you skip more than one gear when you of your vehicle. downshift, you could lose control And you could injure yourself or others. Don't shift down more than one gear when you downshift. 1 If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 kmh), or if the engine is not running smoothly, you shoulddownshift to the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for good performance. 2-21 Up Shift Light Locking Rear Axle (If Equipped) If you have a manual transmission, you may have a SHIFT light.This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gearfor best fuel economy. SHIFT When this light comeson, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, roadand traffic conditions let you. For the bestfuel economy, accelerate slowlyand shift whenthe light comes on. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quicklychange the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard theSHIFT light when the transfercase is in 4L. 2-22 If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sandor gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle. Four- Wheel Drive (If Equipped) If your vehicle has four-wheeldrive, you can send your engine’s driving powerto all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfactionout of four-wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the part that follows before using four-wheel drive.You should use 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H)for most normal driving conditions. NOTICE: Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain. Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal. If the outside temperature is very hot, or the vehicle has been used under hard driving conditions, there may be a slight delay for the axle to unlock. Manual Transfer Case (If Equipped) The front axle portion of the indicator diagram will light up when youshift into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal. If the front axlelight does not go out immediately after youshift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer case settings: The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. 2-Wheel High (2H):This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. 2-23 4-Wheel High(4H):This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use4H when you need extra traction, such as on wet or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. Neutral (N):Shift to this setting only when your vehicle needs to betowed or when using a power take-off. 4-Wheel Low (4L): This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra power and also gives you a higher driveline ratio.It should be used only for off-road driving. You can shift from 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) to 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or from 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) to 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) while the vehicle is moving. Your front axle will engage faster if you take yourfoot off of the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. In extremely cold weather, it maybe necessary to stop or slow the vehicleto shift into 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H). To shift into or outof 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) or NEUTRAL (N): 1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h) and shift an automatic transmissioninto NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission, press the clutch pedal. 2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous motion. Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the transfer case into 4-WHEEL LOW (4L), or your gears could clash. Remember that driving in 4-WHEEL HIGH(4H) or 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) may reduce fuel economy. Also, driving in four-wheel driveon dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift andrun noisier. When your headlamps or parking lamps are on, rotate the thumb wheel next tothe headlamp switch up to brighten or downto dim your transfercase indicator light. 2-24 3lectronic Transfer Case (If Equipped) 2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. 4HI: This setting engages your front axleto help drive your vehicle. Use4HI when you need extra traction, such as onsnowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. 4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction. You may never need4LO. It sends the maximum powerto all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud or deepsnow andclimbing or descending steep hills. If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case, the transfer case switches are below and to . the left ofthe climate control system. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among three driving settings: Indicator lights in theswitches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will comeon briefly when you turn onthe ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle infor service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed. If for some reason the transfer cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting. 2-25 Shifting from 2HIto 4HI Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI Press and releasethe 4HI switch. This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically with some delay. To shift from 4LOto 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the Shifting from 4HI to 2HI Press and release the 2HIswitch. This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically with some delay. Shifting from 2HIor 4HI to 4LO To shift from 2HIor 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL(N). The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and releasethe 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicleis in gear and/or moving, the4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not completethe shift unless your vehicle is moving slower than3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL(N). After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to 4HI. 2-26 transmission in NEUTRAL(N). The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO isto have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear. If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will notcomplete the shift unless the vehicle is moving slower than3 mph (4.8 k m h ) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). Parking Brake To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your leftfoot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the lever, located just above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE RELEASE. NOTICE: Driving with the parking brakeon can cause your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other to be sure parts of your vehicle. Always check your parking brake is fully released before you drive. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex. That section shows what to dofirst to keep the trailer from moving. If you have a 3500 HD model, it is recommended that the propshaft mounted parking brake be burnished as part of the new vehicle break-in. The parking brake will work bestafter it has been burnished following these instructions. Make 10 stops, using the parking brake foot pedal, from 20 mph (32 kmh) about 2 1/2 miles (4 km) apart. In between stops, drive the vehicle at 20 rnph (32 km/h). If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off. 2-27 Chifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission Models Only) 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this: A CA IT IN: 1 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fullyin PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you have four-wheeldrive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will befree to roll, evenif your shift lever is inPARK (P).So, be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear not inNEUTRAL (N).If you’re pullinga trailer, see &‘Towing a Trailer” in the Index. -- 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2-28 0 Pull the lever toward you. Leaving Your VehicleWith the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission Models Only) 0 Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle wit1 the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the parking brakefirmly set. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N),your vehicle willbe free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N).And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could beinjured. Don’t leave your vehicle withthe engine running unless you have to. -- 2-29 If you haveto leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) If you are parking on a hill and youdon’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle mayput too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill to take someof the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). 2-30 Shifting Out ofPARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then, move the shift leverto any gear you want. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the key to OFF. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the vehicle and shiftto the drive gear you want. 5. Have the brake-transmission shift interlock system fixed as soon as you can. Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission Models Only) Parking Over Things That Burn Before you get out of your vehicle, putyour manual transmission in REVERSE (R), turn off the engine, and firmly apply the parking brake. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t. If you are parking on a hill, or if you are pulling a trailer. see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. A CAUTION: r I Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. 2-31 Engine Exhaw, I Running Your Engine While You’re Parked (Automatic Transmission) It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if ever have to, hereare some things to know. Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), whichyou can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death. You might have exhaust coming in if: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. 0 Repairs weren’t done correctly. 0 Your vehicle or exhaust system hadbeen modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: Drive it only withall the windows down to blow out any CO; and 0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-32 I A CAUTION: Idling the engine with the air system control off could allowdangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”). Also, idling ina closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide(CO)into yourvehicle even if the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in theIndex.) -- -- A CAUTION: Windows It can be dangerous to get ofout your vehicle if (P) with the the shift lever is not fully PARK in parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave yourvehicle whenthe engineis running unlessyou have to. If you’ve left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. To be sure your You or others could be injured. vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). Turn the hand crank on eachdoor to raise or lower manual windows. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will befree to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N).Always set your parking brake. Follow theproper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. Manual Windows Power Windows (If Equipped) Regular and Extended Cab If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. 2-33 Press the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window. Press the front of the switch with the power window symbol on it to raise the window. The driver’s window also has an express down feature that allows the windowto belowered without holding the switch. Press and holdthe side of the window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the express down mode. The express down modecan be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the window partway, lightlytap the switch until the window is at the desired position. Crew Cab If you have the optional power windows, thecontrols are on each of the side doors. The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN. 2-34 Lockout Switch (Crew Cab) If you have a Crew Cab and power windows,the power window switch hasa lockout feature. This feature prevents the rear windows fromoperating when the front driver’s side switch is in LOCK. The windows can still beoperated using the driver’s window switch. When the switch is moved to NORM,the rear power windows will operate again. Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab) To open a rear swing-out window, just flipthe latch open and swing the glass out. Sliding Rear Window(If Equipped) To open the sliding rear window, unlockthe latch lever by moving the lever toward the driver’sside. Release the lever from the latch plate andslide the window toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. To close the window, slide the windowtoward the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch lever will automatically snap locked on the latch plate. Try to open the window without releasing the latchlever to be sure the window is in the locked position. Horn The latch will catch when the window is fully open and hold the window in theopen position. On air bag-equipped vehicles, press the air bagmodule in the center of the steering wheelto sound the horn. On vehicles notequipped with an air bag, press the pad in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn. 2-35 Tilt Wheel (If Equipped) Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest levelto give your legs more room whenyou enter and exit the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold thesteering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheelto a comfortable level, then release thelever to lock the wheel in place. The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your: Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator, 0 Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer, WindshieldWipers, 0 0 2-36 Windshield Washer and Cruise Control (If Equipped). n r n Signal and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turnor a lane change. If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, asignal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you When theturn is finished, the lever will return automatically.signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse (see “Fuses andCircuit Breakers” in theIndex). An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Headlamp HigldLow Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way towards you. Then release it. When the high beamsare on, this light on the instrument panel also will be on. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. 2-37 Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning theknob with the wiper symbol on it. For a single wipingcycle, turn the knob to MIST. Hold it there untilthe wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, holdthe knob on MIST longer. You can set the wiper speedfor a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the knobto choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay. 2-38 For steady wiping at low speed, turn the knob to the LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the knob further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the knob to OFF. Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sureto clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.If your bladesdo become damaged, get new bladesor blade inserts. Heavy ice or snow can overload your wipers.The windshield wiper motoris protected from overload by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Although protectedfrom electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow,etc. may cause wiper linkage damage. Alwaysclear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers. The use of a hood mountedair deflector may adversely affect windshield wiper and washer performance. Windshield Washer At the topof the lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To smav washer fluid on the Ginishield, push the paddle. I In freezing weather, don’t useyour washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision. Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle. When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop or return to the preset speed. 2-39 Cruise Control (If Equipped) With cruise control, youcan maintain a speedof about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off. 2-40 A CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed I /\ CAUTION: Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you applythe brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. - - If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switchOFF until you want to use it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 kmh) or more, you can move the cruise switch from ON to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. f 1. Move the cruise switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. You’ll go right back upto your chosen speed and stay there. Remember, if you hold the switch at R/Alonger than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold theswitch at R/A. 2-41 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: 0 0 Use the accelerator pedal to getto the higher speed. Press the buttonat the end of the lever, thenrelease the button and theaccelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch fromON to WA. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. (To increase your speedin very small amounts, move the switch toWA for less than half a second. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 k m h ) faster.) Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control: 0 Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed youwant, then release it. 0 To slow down in very small amounts, press tne button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k m h ) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase yourspeed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed youset earlier. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than 15 mph (24 km/h) below the set speed, your cruise control will automatically disengage. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this tobe too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: 0 Step lightly on the brake pedal or Move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory erased. is Lamps 0 Taillamps, License Plate Lamps, 0 Instrument Panel Lights and Transfer Case Shift Indicator Light (Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles). Rotate the knob clockwise again to the master lighting symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps. Rotate the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off your lamps. Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the driver’s side of your instrument panel. Rotate the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol to turn on: 0 Rotate the thumb wheel next to the knob up toadjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. You can switch your headlamps from high to low beams by pulling on the turn signal/multifunction lever. Parking Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps, Clearance Lamps (If Equipped), 2-43 Headlamps On Reminder A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on and the keyis turned to the OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY position. If you need to use your headlamps when the key is turned to OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY, the buzzercan be turned off by turning the thumb wheel next to the parkinglampheadlamp knob all the way down. Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: the ignition is on, 0 the headlamp switch is off and 0 the parking brake is released. 2-44 When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker andother lamps won’t beon. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light ais reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you shouldturn on the regular headlamp system when you needit. Press the ribbed top part of the switchto turn the fog lamps on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn them If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy off. A light will glow in the switch when thefog lamps or misty conditions.Your parking lamps andor low-beam are on. to work. headlamps must be on for your fog lamps Remember, fog lamps alone will not giveoff as much The foglamp switch is on light as your headlamps. Never use yourfog lamps in the lower edge of your the dark without turning on your headlamps. instrument panel. Fog lamps willgo off whenever your high-beam headlamps come on. When the high beamsgo off, the fog lamps will come on again. Fog Lamps (If Equipped) 2-45 Interior Lamps Front Reading Lamps(If Equipped) If your vehicle has reading Instrument Panel Intensity Control lamps, press the button next to the lamp to turn thelamp on. The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want. The instrument panel intensitycontrol is located to the right of the headlamp switch. 1 Rotate the thumb wheel up to adjust instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED display to full intensity whenthe headlamps or parking lamps are on.To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) rotate the thumb wheel upto the second notch position. Illuminated Entry Press the button again to turn the lamp off. Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature. Dome Lamps When the doors are opened,the dome lamps will come on if the dome lamp button is out. When all the doors are closed, or the dome lamp button is pressed in, the lamps will stay onfor a short periodof time and will then go out. The dome lamps will comeon when you open the doors. 2-46 You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the thumb wheel, located next to the parkingheadlamps knob, all the way upto the second notch. In this position, the dome lamps will remainon whether the doors are opened or closed. Cargo Lamp Press the ribbedtop part of the switch to turn the cargo lamp on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn it off. You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located below the parkingheadlamp knob, to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are opened, or remain off. To turn the lampsoff, press the button once. With the button in thisposition, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button again and return it to the “out” position. With the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you open the door. The dome lamp switch must beon or oneof the doors open for the cargo lamp to work. 2-47 I Mirrors Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass (If Equipped) Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside rearview mirror. When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper levelto minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. Press or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce glare from headlamps behind youafter dark. The mirror also includesan eight point compass display in the upper rightcorner of the mirrorface. When on, the compass automatically calibrates asthe vehicle is driven.. 2-48 Compass Operation Press COMP to turn the compass on or off. When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display thecompass heading. When cleaning the mirror, usea paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Compass Calibration Mirror Operation The right sideof the switch located at the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on andoff. The AUTO LED will come on when the electrochromic mirror is turned on.To turn the mirror on, press and hold the MIRROR button for three seconds. The mirror will darken and remain dark until the button is released. To turn the mirror off, press and release theMIRROR button. If after two seconds the display does not show a compass heading ( “ N ’ for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic notepad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the letter “C”should ever appear in the compass window, themirror may need calibration. The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways: 0 Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction, or 0 Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine. Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It willbe necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compass variance: 1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of the mirror. 2. Press and hold theCOMP button for three seconds until a zone numberappears in the display. 3. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2-50 4. Press the COMP button on the bottomof the mirror until the new zone numberappears in the display. After you stop pressing the button in, the display will show a compass direction within afew seconds. Outside Manual Adjust Mirror Convex Outside Mirror Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle and havea clear view of objects behind you. Some mirrors can befolded in to enter narrow doorways. Your passenger’s side mirror may beconvex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors (If Equipped) Select the mirror you want to move by moving the center of the switch, located on the driver’s door armrest, to L (left) or R (right). A CAUTION: - - A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hita vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder befor changing lanes. Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where you want it. The use of hood mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance. 2-51 Storage Compartments Center Overhead Console (If Equipped) Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments designed to store small items. Your vehicle may have an overheadconsole. It has storage compartments inside it. Your vehicle includes a number of storage compartments for storage of often-used items. Installing a GarageDoor Opener If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument panel. compartment can be usedto conveniently store the opener. Use these spaces for items such as gloves or small books. 1. To install the garage door opener, first open the Some models have astorage pocket on each of the compartment door by pressing the release front doors. button forward. Some vehicles have astorage area behind the seat. 2. Peel the protective backing from the hook Glove Box and loop patch. Press it To open your glove box, move the button towardthe firmly to the back of passenger’s side and pull thedoor open. your garage door opener, as close to the center of the opener as possible. 2-52 3. Center the garage door opener activation button over the console door button, and press theopener firmly into place. The pegs inside the compartment door are used to make sure the button onthe compartment door will contact the control button on the garage door opener. I 4. Add one peg at a time until the PUSH button on the compartment door operates the garage door opener, with the compartment door closed, when you press the button marked PUSH. 5. Now, with the compartment door closed, press the button marked PUSH again to make sure the garage door opener operates properly. With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of pegs in place, you should only have to pressthe PUSH button slightly to operate the opener. 6. Adjust the positionof the garage door opener and add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly. Sunglasses Storage Compartment The center overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store your sunglasses. To open the center compartment, press the release of the compartment door. button located at the rear Instrument Panel Cupholder Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the instrument panel. To use the cupholder, pull the handle andslide the cupholder tray open. To close the cupholder, slide it back into the instrument panel. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. The rear compartment can be usedto store a small item, like a book. To open the rear compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door. 2-54 Center Console Storage Area(If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a console compartment between the bucket seats. Your console also has a cupholder that swings out for the back seat passengers to use. To open it, lift the latch handle and swing the door open. 2-55 There is also a drawer that slides out from the bottom of the console. 2-56 Memo Pad Holder Your vehicle may havea memo holder attached to the front of the console. Useit to hold padsof paper or similar items. CassetteKornpactDisc Storage Your vehicle may have a cassette/compact disc holder at the front of the console. The holder will store up to four compact disc cases,up to fourcassette tape cases, or any combination of these items that adds up to four. Armrest Storage Compartment (If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage compartment in the front bench seat. To open it, fold down thearmrest and press the latch handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the lid pop up and swing open. The storage compartment has a cassettekompact disc holder. The holder will store up to five compact disc cases and up to six cassette tape cases. 2-58 The storage compartment also has a folding writing table on top of the armrest lid. To use the writing table, pull the latch atthe rear of the table and swingthe writing table forward. Use it to hold a pad of paper anda pen. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Front Ashtray The front ashtray is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. Pull on the notch in the ashtray door toopen it. To remove the front ashtray, press the retainerspring and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray, place the bottom partof the ashtray on the pivot bar at the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel. Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position. I NOTICE: If you store paperor other things that burn in your ashtrays, they could be set fire on by cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could Do cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle. not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays. 2-59 To use the cigarette lighter, pushit in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. Rear Ashtray(If Equipped) To US& a fear ashtray, if you have them, pull at the top of the ashtray doorto flipthe door open. NOTICE: To remove a rear ashtray, press downon the inside tabs and open the door fully. NOTICE: I If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays, they could be set onbyfire cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could cause a fire andpossibly damage yourvehicle. Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays. 2-60 Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element. Just push the lighter all the way in andlet go. When it’s done, itwill pop back by itself. Accessory Power Outlets Sun Visors To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows. Your visor may have a strap to hold small items, such as maps. Some visors have an extender on the inside edge. When the visor isdown, pull the extender out for extra glare coverage at the front or side. Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. Some visors have mirrors withlamps. If the mirror has lamps, they will come on when you lift the mirror cover. 2-61 Instrument Panel d 2-62 A. Dome Lamp Switch K. Ashtray B. Lamp Controls L. Cupholder C. Air Outlets M. Auxiliary Power Outlets D. Multifunction Lever N. Storage Area or Compact Disc P1 er (If Eqllipped) E. Instrument Cluster 0. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped) E Gearshift Lever P. Passenger Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (Air Bag) Off Switch (If Equipped) G. Audio System H. Comfort Control System I. Glove Box J. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (Air Bag) (If Equipped) Q. Tilt Lever (If Equipped) R. Parking Brake Release S. Hood Release T. Fuse Block Instrument Panel Cluster CHECK GAGES SERWCE ENGINE SOON lolololo1 TRIP lo 0 0 0 oolol I APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT FROM PARK I United States version shown, Canada similar. Your instrument cluster is designedto let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how fast you're going, abouthow much fuel you have and many other thingsyou'll need to know to drive safely and economically, 2-64 Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph)and kilometers per hour (kmh). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada). The trip odometer can tell you how rar your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. Tamper-Resistant Odometer To reset the trip odometer, fully pressthe reset button located near the trip odometer readout. If the reset button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer may not go all the way backto zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to press the reset button againto reset the readoutto zero. Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back. Tachometer You may wonder what nappens lr your vehicle needsa new odometer installed. If the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, thenit must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set atzero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. I NOTICE: Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). On vehicles with a manual transmission,if you operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, your engine or other parts could be damaged Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn’t covere by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area. 2-65 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights andgages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights andgages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attentionto your warning lights andgages could also saveyou or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. 2-66 Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key isturned to RUN or START, a tone will come on forabout eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unlessthe driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about 55 seconds. If the driver’s belt is alreadybuckled, neither the tone nor the light will come on. Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks theair bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tellsyou if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, theair bag module, the wiring andthe diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system, see “AirBag’’ in the Index. AIR BAG This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine orcomes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition keyto RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem. 2-67 AIR BAG OFF Light (Except Crew Cab) When you turn the rightfront passenger’s air bag off, this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the air bag has been turned off.This light will go off when you turnthe air bag back on again.See “Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for more on this, including important safety information. 2-68 /II CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s air bag isturned off, an adult ora child who isno longer an infant sitting in the right front passenger’s position won’t have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the air bag wouldn’t beable to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Make sure the air bag isturned on unless youare using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. Charging System Indicator Light If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag, it means that something may be wrong withthe air bag system. The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate even though the switch isoff. If this ever happens, don’t secure a rear-facing child restraint in your vehicle until you have your vehicle serviced. I-+I This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, before starting the engine, as a check to show you it is working. After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and the air conditioner. - 2-69 Voltmeter When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. Readings in the low warningzone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle andthe engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is notable to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging systemto create maximum power. You can only drive for a short time withthe reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories. When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range. 2-70 Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the 0the.rpart can still work andstop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if BRAKE I A CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the brakesystem warning lightis on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when youset your parking brake.Thl light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brakeis fully released, it means you havea brake problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedalis harder to push. Or, the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 2-71 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’thave anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.See “Brake System Warning Light”earlier in this section. It also provides an indicatorof how hard your vehicleis working. During a majorityof the operation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normalfor the temperature to fluctuate and approach the260°F ( 125 “C) mark. If the gage reaches the260°F ( 125“C) mark, itindicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows whatto do. See“Engine Overheating” in the Index. ANTI LOCK 2-72 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine) SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light not on, aftera while, your emission controls may work as well, your fuel economy may not as be good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. This light should come on, asa check to show you it is working, when the ignitionis on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t comeon, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one This system is called OBDI1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure of two ways: that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. (In detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.) may damage the emission control system on your The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis indicate that there is a problem and service is required. and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before Light On Steady -- An emission control system any problem is apparent.This may prevent more serious malfunction has beendetected on your vehicle. damage to your vehicle. This systemis also designed Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing service may be required. any malfunction. 2-73 If the LightIs Flashing If the LightIs On Steady The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: You may be ableto correct the emission system malfunction by considering thefollowing: 0 0 Reducingvehicle speed. Did you recently put fuelinto your vehicle? Avoidinghard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with thecap properly installed should turn the light off. Avoiding steep uphill grades. If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashing and remainson steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues toflash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safeplace to park your vehicle. Turn the keyoff, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remainson steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service. 2-74 Did you just drive througha deep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Are you low on fuel? As your engine starts to run outof fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuelline causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It will take a few driving tripsto turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle withquality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and causethe light to turn on. If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It willrequire at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. l r none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Oil Pressure Gage 0 m” 80 The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readingsabove the low pressure zoneindicate the normal operating range. A reading in the low pressure zone may be causedby a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure.Check your oil as soon as possible. 2-75 A Up Shift Light (If Equipped) CXJTION: Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire.You or others could beburned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. NOTICE: Damage to your enginefrom neglected oil problems can be costlyand is not covered by your warranty. 2-76 c3 This light is used on some models with manual transmissions. SHIFT The SHIFT indicator light will helpyou get the bestfuel economy. See “Shift Light” or “Shift Speeds” in this section for more information. Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light Check Gages Light This light will come on briefly when youare starting the engine. This light goes on whenever the DRL are on. :::O .e. When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator light is a reminder to turn on your headlamps. CHECK GAGES If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. Itcould be a problem with youroil pressure, coolant temperature, or some other problem. Check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones.If they are, have your vehicle serviced right away. Fuel Gage The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuelyou have left in your tank, Here are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (F). It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually tooka little more or less than half the tank's capacity tofill the tank. The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible. The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up. The gage doesn't go back to EMPTY (E) when you turn off the ignition. If you have a diesel engine, see "Fuel Gage" in the Diesel Engine Supplement. 2-78 Section 3 Comfort Controls and AudioSystems In this section, you'll find out howto operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with vour vehicle. 3-2 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9 3- 12 Comfort Controls Air Conditioning Heating Ventilation System Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger Audio Systems Setting the Clock AM-FM Stereo Radio Playing the Radio AM-F" Stereo with Cassette Tape Player AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Automatic Tone Control 3- 15 3- 16 3-20 3-2 1 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-26 CD Adapter Kit AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control Playing a Compact Disc in theSingle Remote Disc Player Theft-Deterrent Feature Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Fixed Mast Antenna Comfort Controls Heater Control System I the relative air temperature independently of the function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Move the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air. Mode Knob The right knob on thecontrol panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob can be placed in any position between two mode settings to blend the flowof air. -be /J VENT This setting directs air through the instrument panel outlets. +e + VENTDIEAT ’ Use this setting to divide airflow +’ between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets. Fan Knob The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase airflow, move theknob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the fan off, move the knob to OFF. Temperature Knob The middle knobon the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. This knob will allow youto adjust 3-2 0 HEATER: This setting directs air through the floor outlets. w. DEFOG: This + ’setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield. DEFROST: This setting directs air toward the windshield. Heater and Air Conditioning Control System:;(If Equipped) Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel letsyou select the relative temperatureof the air flowing into the passenge area of your vehicle. Thisknob will allow youto adjust of the function the relative air temperature independently knob setting. Move the knob clockwise toward the red the knob counterclockwise area for warmer air. Move toward the blue area for cooler air. Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob can be placed in any position betweentwo mode settings to blend the flow of air. +e Fan Knob /J VENT This setting directs air through the The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it towardLO. To turn the fan off, move the knob to OFF. If you have the air conditioner on, moving the fan knob to OFF also turns off the A/C compressor. instrument panel outlets. In OFF, while driving, ram airflow will vent to the floor outlets. The mode knob will not redirect ram airflow to other selected outlet positions. This is normal operation for the OFF position. +’ +e + ’ , VENTHEAT Use this setting to divide airflow between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets. HEATER: This setting directs air through the heater floor outlets. w. ’6 DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield. DEFROST This setting directs air toward the windshield. 3-3 Air Conditioning On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape. This reduces the timeit takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best. The recirculation button, betweenthe fan and temperature knobs, allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and/or dust from entering the vehicle. When usingthe air conditioner, turn off recirculation afterthe vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature. When the rightknob on the control panel is between HEATER and DEFROST, the recirculationfeature will not function. The A/C button, between the temperature and mode knobs, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days. When you use A/C with the recirculation button pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature. 3-4 With the A/C on, move the temperatureknob to MAX for maximum cooling.This setting also puts the system to maximize your in the recirculation mode and helps air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’sfuel economy. This setting also cools the air thefastest. After the vehicle’sinterior reaches a comfortable temperature, move the temperatureknob clockwise to place the air conditioning system inthe normal mode. Heating The heater works bestif you keep your windows closed while using it.On cold days, usethe HEATER or VENTMEAT setting withthe temperature knob in the red area. If you use theengine coolant heater before starting your engine in cold weather,20°F (-8 O C) or lower, your heating system will producewarmer air faster, to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather. The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takesfor the engine to reach normal operating temperature, and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output. For moreinformation, see “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets. Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outsideair to the insideof your vehicle when it is moving.With the side windows closed, air will flow into the frontair inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air exhaust valves. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the recirculation button pushed in. For more information on the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier in this section. Your vehicle has air outletsin the center and on the sides of your instrument panel. You can move the outlets from side to side orup and down to direct the flow of air, or close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open. These outlets do not completely shut off airflow when in the closed position. 3-5 Ventilation Tips 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snowor any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turnthe blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air tocirculate throughout your vehicle. 0 The use of hood air deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system. Defogging and Defrosting On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear.Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the temperature knob toward the red area andthe fan control toward HI. 3-6 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) If you see lines running across the rear window, you have a rear window defogger.The lines warm the glass. To turn on the rear window defogger, press this button next to the fan control knob. The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN. For best results, clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible first. The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes. If you need additional warming time, press the button again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid onthe rear window. NOTICE: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Audio Systems Your DelcoB audio system has been designed to operate easily and give yearsof listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco system cando and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most outof the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clockfor Systems without Automatic Tone Control Press SET. Within five seconds, press and holdthe SEEK right arrow untilthe correct minute appears on the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the correct hour appears on the display. Setting the Clockfor Systems with Automatic Tone Control Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and holdMIN until the correct minute appears on the display.To display the clock with the ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MIN and the time will be displayed for afew seconds. There is an initial two-second delay before theclock goes into the time-set mode. 3-7 AM-FM Stereo TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune inradio stations. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher tune to the next lower station and the left arrow to station and staythere. SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen toa few seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light upon the display. Press the right arrowto tune in the next higher station and pressthe left arrow to tune to the next lower station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to stop scanning. Playing the Radio VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. RECALL: Display the time withthe ignition off by pressing the recall knob. Whenthe radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency. Finding a Station AM AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between and FM. The display shows your selection. 3-8 PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 5 . Press and hold oneof the four pushbuttons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped) 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. Setting theTone BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass. TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may Playing the Radio Adjusting the Speakers VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. RECALL: Display the time withthe ignition off by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this knob to recall the station frequency. want to decrease the treble. FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. 3-9 Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch betweenAM, FM1 and FM2. TUNE: Turn the lowerknob to tune in radiostations. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the aext higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 5. Press and hold oneof the four pushbuttons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 3-10 In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each bandby pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 3. Press two adjoining buttons at thesame time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same two buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons. P.SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan througheach of your preset stations. The system will scan through and play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or decrease bass. TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increaseor decrease treble. If a station is weakor noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind the lowerknob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound betweenthe speakers. Playing a CassetteTape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on eachside. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME, BAL FADE, BASS andTREB just as you do for the radio. REV Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop reversing the tape. FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop forwarding the tape. RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides. EJECT Press this buttonto remove the tape or stop the tape and play the radio. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean the player, press and holdEJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. . . 3-11 AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyparticular speed. The volume level should always soundthe same to you as you drive. If you don’t wantto use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for more volume compensation ata faster rate of speed. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM, FMl and FM2. The display will showyour selection. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press thisknob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn theknob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.The knob is capable of being rotated continuously. RECALL: Display thetime with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency. SCV: Your system has afeature called Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automaticallyto make upfor road 3-12 TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn itto choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound willmute while seeking. SCAN: Press and holdSEEK for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display.SCAN allows youto listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station until you press the button again.The sound willmute while scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. 5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the toneyou selected will be automatically selected for that button. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, F M 1 or FM2 mode and then press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press P.SCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P.SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode.If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (PI-P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station. Setting theTone BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS control isrotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE: Press this buttonto select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice beingheard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch to one of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, COUNTRYNESTERN or JAZZ. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until the AUTO TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREBcontrols. If a BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. 3-13 Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the controlclockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers andcounterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn thecontrol clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when you’re not using them. Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition is on but the radio is off,the tape will begin playing. Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREBcontrols just asyou do for the radio. The tape symbol and a directionarrow will 3-14 be on the display whenevera tape is being played. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for play first. The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound. For metal tapes, thedouble-D symbol will appear on the display. PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previousselection. A minimum three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginningof the selection. The tape direction arrow will blinkduring the SEEK operation. PROG (2): Press this buttonto switch from one side of the tape to the other. NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection.A minimum three-second blank gap isrequired for the player to stop at the beginningof the selection. The tapedirection arrow will blinkduring the SEEK operation. The sound will mute while searchingfor the next selection. REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again. The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape.The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation. 00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the The double-D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode. cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again. The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation. AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio. TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in the active mode. EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will now play. EJECTcan be used witheither the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with yourcassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player. To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on. Turn your radio off. Press TAPE AUX and hold for three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active. Insert the adapter cassette again. It will power up the radio and begin playing. This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed. 3-15 AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped) and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Movethe control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume,as necessary, to overcome noise at any particularspeed. The volume level should always sound thesame to you as you drive. If you don't want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down.Each detent on the control ring allows for more volume compensation ata faster rate of speed. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will showyour selection. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the systemon and off. To increase volume, turn thisknob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. RECALL: Display thetime with the ignitionoff by pressing this button. When theradio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency. SCV: Your system has afeature called Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up forroad 3-16 TUNE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Pushthe knob back into its stored position whenyou're not using it. SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there.The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until SCAN appearson the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds.The receiver will continue to scan and momentarilystop at each station until you pressthe button again. The sound will mute while scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. 5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the tone youselected will be automatically selected for that button. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. P.SCAN: The preset scan button letsyou scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, F M 1 or FM2 mode and then press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before continuing to scan through allof the pushbuttons. PressPSCAN again or oneof the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN will lightup on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (Pl-P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station. Setting theTone BASS: Press lightly on thisknob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTOTONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the button, the selection will switch toone of the preset settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, COUNTRY/WESTERN or JAZZ. To return to the manual mode, press and release this button until the AUTO TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. aIf BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank. 3-17 Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn thecontrol clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers andcounterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers.The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn thecontrol clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when you’re not using them. Playing a Compact Disc PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please note that you can also turn the systemon when you insert a compact disc into the player with the ignition on.) Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc should play.CD and a CD symbol will also appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol. 3-18 If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that: You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc should play when the roadgets smoother.) 0 The disc is upside down. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) The disc player is very hot. Press RECALL to make ERRgo off the display. PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection.If you hold this button or press it more than once, the disc will advance further. Sound is muted inthis mode. RDM (2): Press this buttonto play the tracks on the disc in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to normal play. NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. If you hold this buttonor press it more than once, thedisc will advance further. The next track number willappear on the display. Sound is muted in this mode. REV (4): Press and hold REVto return rapidly to a favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the REV button.This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired selection. Release REV to resume playing. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is atthe desired selection. Release FWD to resume playing. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing. Press it again withinfive seconds to see how long the CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is displayed in minutes and tenthsof a second. The track number will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press RECALL againto return to the time display. CD AUX: To switch between the playerand the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.To return to the player, pressCD AUX. When a disc is playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the display. (If the radio is turned off, thedisc stays in the player and willresume playing at the point where it stopped.) EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the player and play the radio. When thesame or a new disc is inserted, the disc will start playingon track one. If a compact disc is left sitting in theopening for more than a few seconds, the player willpull the CD back in. The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off, press this buttonto load a CD. If you leave a compact disc in the player while listeningto the radio, it may become warm. AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol will still display but the word CD will be replaced with either AM, FMl orFM2. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.) 3-19 Playing a Compact Disc in the Single Remote Disc Player (If Equipped) If you have this option, you can play one compact disc (CD) at a time. To load a CD into the player, hold thedisc with the label side up and insertit carefully into the player (approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be pulled into the player.If the radio is off and the ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and begin playing the CD. Itis possible to load and unload CDs with the ignition off. Toload a disc withthe ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote player and theninsert the disc. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player. A disc that has been ejected but still is sitting in the remote CD player willbe pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc and player fromdamage. The disc will not start playing. To remove the disc, press theEJECT button and remove the disc from the player. All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a disc is playing, the lettersCD will appear next to the CD symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will also be displayed. If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it couldbe that: 0 The disc is upside down. It is dirty, scratched or wet. There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hour and try again.) You are driving on a very rough road. Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or cannot be corrected. PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc. NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc. also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed. REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage. TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing, press this button once to play the compact disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage. SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track. It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the left arrow again to go toprevious tracks. Press the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc. RANDOM: Press PSCAN to enter the random play mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT while in the random mode, the previous or next track will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn off RANDOM and return to normal operation. RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing. When a new track starts to play, the track number will EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc. If you leave a compact disc in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code todisable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed. The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate. 3-21 Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow,explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code. NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds toelapse between any steps, the radioautomatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over atStep 4. 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off. 1. Write down any threeor four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it ina safe place separate from the vehicle. Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss or RUN. 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY 3. Turn the radio off. Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down. 5 . Press MN and000 will appear on the display. 6. Press MN again to make thelast two digits agree with your code, 7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 3-22 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press MN again to make the last twodigits agree with your code. 4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secretcode you have written down. The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure. If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears. If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on andLOC will appear on the display. To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section. 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. Understanding Radio Reception 2. Turn the radio off. FM Stereo 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FTvl signals, causing the sound to come and go. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is no longer secured. AM The range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noiseif you ever get it. 3-23 Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautionsby adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe sound level before your hearingadapts to it. To help avoid hearingloss or damage: 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. 3-24 NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tapeplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interferewith the operationof your vehicle’s engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s of systems may interfere with the operation sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer andbe sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. -- -- Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player should becleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may displayCLN to indicate that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, yourcassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, trya known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault.If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean thetape player. Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads whichscrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning because your unit is equipped with a cut tape feature. To temporarily override this feature for vehicles with Automatic Tone Control(for one insertion), turn on the ignition then turn the radio off and press and hold TAPE AUX until the tape symbol flashes on the display, then insert the cassette again. For vehicles without Automatic Tone Control, press both SEEK arrows within five seconds of inserting the cassette with the ignition and radio off. Insert the cassette at least three times toensure thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your GM dealership. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject. It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. 3-25 The cassette tape player is able to detect a broken tape. Some cleaning cassettes may appear as a broken tape. If the cleaning cassette is ejected immediately from the tape player, follow thesesteps: 1. Turn the radio off. 2. Turn the ignition on. 3. Press and hold the TAPE-AUX button until thetape symbol flashes. 4. Insert the cleaning cassette and the radio willturn on in cassette mode. 5. Eject the tape after the tape player has beencleaned. When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken tape detection feature is active again. EJECT for After you clean the player, press and hold five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display --- to show theindicator was reset. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always makesure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. 3-26 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from thecenter to the edge. Be sure never to touchthe signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged.If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, asit might be by vandals, you should replace it. Check every once ina while to besure the mast is still tightened to the cowl. Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. 4- 2 4-3 4-6 4-6 4-9 4-11 4- 12 4- 13 4- 14 4-27 4-29 Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off-Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Driving Guidelines Driving at Night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4-32 4-32 4-34 4-35 4-35 4-37 4-4 1 4-45 4-45 4-45 City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Loading Your Vehicle Camper Wiring Harness Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab Towing a Trailer 4-1 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start witha very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts”in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do, Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both cityand rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 4-2 Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’sthe number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much“ if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: 0 Judgment 0 Muscular Coordination 0 The drinker’s body weight 0 Vision 0 0 Attentiveness. The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The amount of alcohol consumed According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg) person whodrinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reachthe same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, ginor vodka. 4-3 Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reacha higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight wheneach has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the persondrinks them. It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will havea somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of’body water thanmen. 4-4 But the ability to drive is affected well belowa BAC of 0. I O percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night.All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who havea BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; ata level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll becareful” isn’t the right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency,a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not beendrinking. I A CAUTIO;.: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking. Please don’t drink anddrive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink. -- -- 4-5 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’sreaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all playa part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could bea lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet,dry, icy); tire tread; thecondition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and th mount of brake force applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow orice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine everstops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake.Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push. Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin todrive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motoror clicking noise while this test is going on. Thisis normal. ANTI LOCK If there’s a problem with th anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. 4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the mostof available tire and road conditions. Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animaljumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happenswith ABS. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is aboutto stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at the rear wheels. 4-8 You can steer around theobstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Variable Effort Steering Using Anti-Lock Steering Tips Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake a.t the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. This system varies the amount of steering effort proportionate to your vehicle speed. Steering is easier at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease. As your vehicle speed increases, the steering effort also increases. At highway speeds, the amount of steering effort is increasedfor vehicle control and stability. Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot ofthe “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happenon curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics whendriving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia willkeep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. 4-9 Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems-- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet too the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand much of those places. You can lose control. What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you areout of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-10 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steeringcan be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time forevasive action -- steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.(See “Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheelshave dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times andwear safety belts properly. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel upto one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. The turn your steering wheel togo straight down the roadway. 4-11 Passing The driver of a vehicle aboutto pass another on a two-lane highway waitsfor justthe right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicleahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passingdriver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait fora better time. Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken 4-12 center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep backa reasonable distance. When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear tu pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makesup for the distance you would lose by dropping back. Andif something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down anddrop back again,and wait for another opportunity. 0 0 0 0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicleto see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease alittle to the right. Loss of Control Let’s review whatdriving experts say about what happens when thethree control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seekan escape route or areaof less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid and anacceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. 4-13 If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straightenout. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on theroad. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. Driving Guidelines Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive. Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in theIndex. If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive,you shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’reon a level, solid surface. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any suddenchanges could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice orpacked snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface’’-- and slow down when you have any doubt. Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. Remember: Any anti-lock brakesystem (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read thisguide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and moreenjoyable. 4-14 “Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphillor downhill. In short, you’ve gone right back to nature. Before You Go Off-Roading There aresome things to do before you go out. For example, besure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Willyou be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. Loading Your Vehiclefor Off-Road Driving There aresome important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around. a Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than 0 0 the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. You or your passengers could beinjured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. Unsecured cargo on the load floorcan be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Securethe cargo properly. Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s center of gravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over.Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible. You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index. 4-15 Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas Off-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges every off-roader to follow these basic rulesfor protecting the environment: It makes sense to plan your trip, especiallywhen going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get badsurprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learnof any blocked or closed roads. 0 Always use established trails, roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off-road recreational driving; obey all posted regulations. It’s also a good idea to travelwith at least one other vehicle. If something happens to oneof them, the other can help quickly, 0 Avoid any drivingpractice that could damage the environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning7 breaking down treesor unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground). Does your vehicle havea winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly. 0 Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving. 0 Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves and lanterns. 0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catchfire from the heat of the vehicle’sexhaust system. 4-16 Getting Familiarwith Off-Road Driving It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does requiresome new and different driving skills. Here’s what we mean. Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best waysto control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds: 0 you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. 0 you have less time to react. 0 you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles. 0 you’ll need more distance for braking, especially since you’re on an unpaved surface. 1 &, CAUTION: When you’re drivingoff-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash.So, whether you’re driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrainand its many different features. Here are some things to consider. Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and brakingof your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kindof surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction andlonger braking distances. &$ace Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles canbe hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Oftenthese obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some thingsto consider: 0 Is the path ahead clear? 0 Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s more discussion of these subjects later.) Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? 4-17 When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughsor other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your handsif you’re not prepared. When you drive over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limitsor signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very timeyou need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. See “Drunken Driving” in the Index. 4-18 Driving on Off-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, downor across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do. There are some hills that simplycan’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. A CAUTION: Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If,youdrive up them, youwill stall. If you drive down them, you can’t control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, don’t drive the hill. Approaching a Hill Driving Uphill When you approach a hill,you need to decide if it’s one of Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or cross. need to take some special steps. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, for 0 Use a low gear and get afirm grip on the example, there may abesmooth, constant incline withonly a steering wheel. small change in elevation where you can easilysee all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper0as Get a smooth start up thehill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use more power thanyou need, you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning the hill is hidden by bushes, grassor shrubs. or sliding. Here are some other things to consider as you approach ahill. 0 4 0 0 0 0 Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers? Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)? What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Getout and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out. Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. 0 Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns,you might want to find another route. Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, aiways try to go straight up. 4-19 0 Ease up on your speed as you approach the topof the hill. 0 Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. 0 Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there. 0 Use your headlampseven during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic. DL- ing to the top (crest)of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle.You or killed. As you near could be seriously injured slow down and stay alert. the top of a hill, 4-20 12.’ What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, andI can’t make it up the hill? A: If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you mustnot do. First, here’s whatyou should do: 0 Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. 0 If your engine is still running,shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back downthe hill in REVERSE(R). 0 If your engine has stopped running, you’ll needto restart it. With the brake pedaldepressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the the hill as parking brake, and slowly back down straight as possible in REVERSE (R). e As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill withyour wheels straight rather than in the leftor right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover. Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill. Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control. Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. e Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill. A: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decideI just can’t do it. What shouldI do? Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in FIRST(I)) and turn off the engine. Leavethe vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clearof the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer caseto NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. (N)can Shifting the transfer case NEUTRAL to cause yourvehicle to roll evenif the transmission is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is because the NEUTRAL (N) position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. If you are going to leave yourvehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission PARK to (P) (or, put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case in the2 Wheel, 4 High or 4 Low position. 4-21 Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakesto overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? 0 Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? 0 What’s at the bottomof the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straightdown, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t haveto do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. 4-22 @ Are there some thingsI should not do when driving down a hill? A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and havea serious accident. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the inclineof the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down. 0 Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift. This is called “free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have todo all the work and could overheat and fade. @ A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. 0 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes, Apply the parking brake. 0 Shift toPARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart the engine. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 0 0 incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. Am I likely to stall when going downhill? If the engine won’t start, get out and get help. Driving Acrossan Incline Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probablygo across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider: 0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When yougo straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width(the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an 0 Surface conditions can be a problem when youdrive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over. 0 Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilteven more. For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully the whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. Driving across an incline that’s too steep will make your vehicle roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about the steepnessof the incline, don’t drive across it. Find another route instead. What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent theside slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this isto get out and “walk the course”so you know what thesurface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you’recrossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers)get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side andthe vehicle starts toroll over, you’ll be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out ofthe path the vehicle will takeif it does roll over. Getting outon the downhill(low) side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and staywell clear of the rollover path. 4-24 Driving in Mud, Sand, SI-T w or Ice When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get goodtraction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances. It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck. When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packedthe sand is. On loosely packed sand(as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tendto sink into the sand, This has an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction. Hard packed snowand ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult brakingcan cause you to slide out of control. /A CAUTION: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only. Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy raincan mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axlesor exhaust pipe, don’t try it-- you probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. 4-25 If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system if you and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop. I Driving througn rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing water. See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more information on driving through water. 4-26 After Off-Road Driving Remove any brushor debris that has collected on the underbody,chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Your vehicle will require morefrequent service due to off-road use. Referto the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. Here are some tips on night driving. Driving at Night 0 Drive defensively. 0 Don't drink and drive. 0 Adjust your inside.rearviewmirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. 0 Since you can't see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. 0 Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. I Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-27 Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. 4-28 Keep yourwindshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that yourheadlamps light up far less of a roadway when youare in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’seasier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as yourheadlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t even aware of it. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. 7/ // It’s wise tokeep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. p////‘!. / .’/ :/ Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because 4-29 Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakeswork normally. Driving too fast through large water puddlesor even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. 4-30 Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standine Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. a NOTICE: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’sair intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do nothave much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. ~~ Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. 0 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) 4-31 City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-32 Here are waysto increase your safetyin city driving: 0 Know the best wayto get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan yourtrip into an unknown part of the cityjust as you would for a cross-country trip. 0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (Seethe next part, “Freeway Driving.”) 0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because thecorner is busy enough to needit. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both waysfor vehicles that havenot cleared the intersectionor may be running the red light. Freeway Driving speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap atclose to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Tryto blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it's slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn't another vehicle in your "blind" spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night. 4-33 When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimesquite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are. Here are some things you can check before a trip: 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows cleaninside and outside? 0 Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape? 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked all levels? 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean? a fires: They are vitally important toa safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Before Leaving on a LongTrip Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou can easily drive in. Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done beforestarting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to helpif you need it. 4-34 0 Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay yourtrip a short time to avoida major storm system? 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Hill and MountainRoads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the hum of the tires on the road, same scenery, along with the the droneof the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen in less to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road than a secund, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. 0 Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. If you get sleepy, pull off the roadinto a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-35 If you drive regularly insteep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and moreenjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving” in the Indexfor information about driving off-road.) 0 Keep your vehicle in good shape.Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads. 0 Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let yourengine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when yougo down a steep or long hill. Coasting downhill in NEUTRl (N)or with the ignition off is dangerous.Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well.You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill. # 0 If you don’t shift down,your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist yourbrakes on asteep downhill slope. 4-36 0 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission,and you can climb thehill better. Stay in your own lane whendriving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There couldbe something in your lane, likea stalled car oran accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you willbe driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or acouple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving onSnow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will needto be very careful. Here are some tips for winter driving: 0 Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. 0 You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. 4-37 Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not to break thefragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. L A What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hardto drive on. But wet ice can be even more troublebecause it may offerthe least traction ofall. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet iceuntil salt and sand crews can get there. 4-38 Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas wherethe sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake whileyou’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If You’re Caught ina Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: 0 Turn on your hazard flashers. 0 Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stoppedby the snow. 0 Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under yourclothing to keep warm. You can run theengine to keep warm, but be careful. Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it,so you might not know itis in yourvehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the baseof your vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to besnow sure doesn’t collect there. Open awindow just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery(or batteries) charged. You will need a well-charged battery (or batteries)to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run forawhile. If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a higher speed to get enough heat.Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeatthis only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuelas long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half houror so until help comes. Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT GAWR RR 0 0 - - - I- COLD TIRE PRE 0 0 u u n n ~ E R MANUAL ~ S FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. The Certificatioflire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document in the cab. The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This iscalled the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Weight Rating (GAWR). To find outthe actual’loadson your front and rear axles, you need to go toa weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. I - A CAI N: - In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured. Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. The Certificatiooire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle 4-41 ‘A CAUT IN: 1 Do not loadyour vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can changethe way your vehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control. Also, overloading canshorten thelife of your vehicle. NOTICE: Your warranty does not coverparts or components that fail because of overloading. If you put thingsinside your vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,they’ll keep going. 4-42 ’A CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehiclecan strike and injurepeople in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secureit whenever you can. Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you need to. There’s also important loading informationfor off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” in the Index. Truck-Camper Loading Information This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how tocorrectly spread out your load. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weightof the camper, plus everything else added to the camper after it left the factory, 0 everything in the camper and 0 all the people inside. The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside. But, you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the point where the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at that point, would balance thefront and rear. The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR. Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the following illustration. 4-43 Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR. After you’ve loaded yourvehicle and camper, driveto a weigh station and weighthe front and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loadson your axles. The loads on the front andrear axles shouldn’t be more than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads should not be more thanthe GVWR. Open your driver’sdoor and look at the Certificationmire label to find out your GAWR and GVWR. B. Recommended Center of Gravity LocationZone If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, moveor take out some things until all the weight falls below the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper. The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the center of gravity zone for your vehicle’scargo load. check When you install and load your slide-in camper, the manufacturer’s instructions. You must weigh any accessoriesor other equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra weight may shortenthe center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. If you want more informationon curb weights, cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and thecorrect center of gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealercan help you. Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.” A. Camper Center of Gravity If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may be larger. 4-44 Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way, andif you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. in the Index. For more information, see “Trailer Towing” Camper Wiring Harness (If Equipped) A five-wire harness is stored in the front stake pocket on the driver’s side of the bed. The harness has no connector and should be wiredby a qualified electrical technician. It must be routed outof your vehicle and securely attached so that it won’t be pulled or rubbed while you’re using it. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may consider having the pickup boxremoved and a commercial or recreational body installed. Before you do so, first contact the GM Zone Office for your area for information on such conversions specific to this vehicle. (See the “Warranty and Owner Assistance” booklet for Zone Office.) Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permitits safe use witha specialized body should be installed by a body builder in accordance with the information available from the Zone Office. Towing a Traile-.- ON: If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, th brakes may not work well or even at all.You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your GM dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. -- 4-45 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty.To pull a trailer correctly, follow GM dealer the advice in this part, and see your for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Every vehicle is readyfor some trailer towing. If yours was built withtrailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. Buttrailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reasonfor this part. In itare many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and thatof your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. 4-46 If you do, here are some important points: 0 There are many differentlaws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police. 0 Consider using a sway controlif your trailer will on your step weigh less than the capacity stamped bumper. You should always usea sway control if your trailer will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrols. 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. 0 Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear inat the heavier loads. If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in OVERDRIVE (@).You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4)gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). Three important considerations have to do with weight: the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongue 0 and the weight on your vehicle’s tires. Weight of th( Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle mode and options. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Above the 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) trailer rating, the engine oil cooler is required onC/K- 1500 andC/K-2500 models with gas engines. Refer to theTrailering Guide for oil cooler recommendations. Above the 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) trailer rating, heavy-duty or gas shock absorbers are required onC-1500 models, and heavy-duty shock absorbers or the off-road chassis package are requiredon K- 1500 models. It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment thatyou have on your vehicle. 4-47 C-1500 (2WD) Engine(Trans.)AxleRatio 4.3L (Auto.) 3.08 3.42 3.73 4.3L (Manual) 3.08 3.42 3.73 5.0L (Auto.) 3.08 3.42 5.0L (Manual) 3.08 3.42 5.7L 3.08 3.42 3.73 6.5L Diesel 3.08 3.42 4-48 K-1500 (4WD) Max. Trailer Wt. 4,000 Ibs. ( 1 800 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg) 2,000 Ibs. (908 kg) 2,500 lbs. ( 1 135 kg) 3,000 lbs. ( I 362 kg) 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg) 5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg) 2,000 Ibs. (908 kg) 3,000 Ibs. (1 362 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) 6,000 Ibs. (2 724 kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 6,000 Ibs. (2 724 kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio 3.73 4.3L (Auto.) 3.73 4.3L (Manual) 3.42 5.0L (Auto.) 3.73 5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3.73 5.7L 3.42 3.73 6.5L Diesel 3.42 3.73 Max. Trailer Wt. 5,000 lbs. (2 270kg) 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg) 5,000 lbs. (2 270kg) 6,000 Ibs. (2 724 kg) 2,500 Ibs. (1 135 kg) 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg) 5,500 Ibs. (2 497 kg) 6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg) 6,000 lbs. ( 2 724 kg) 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) C-2500 (2WD) K-2500 (4WD) Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.TrailerWt. 5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg) 5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 3.73 6,500 lbs.(2951 kg) 3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg) 5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3.73 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) 5.7L 3.42 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg) 3.73 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 8,000 Ibs. (3 632 kg) 4.10 3.42 6,500 lbs. (2 95 I kg) 6.5L Diesel (Auto.) 3.737,500 Ibs. (3 405 kg) 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg) 4.10 7.4L (Auto.) 3.739,000 lbs.* (4086 kg) 4.10 11,OOOlbs.**(4994kg) *Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 9,000 lbs. (4 086 kg). **Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540kg). Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. 5.7L 3.73 6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg) 4.107,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 6.5L Diesel 6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg) 3.42 6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg) 3.73 8,000 lbs. (3632 kg) 4.10 7.4L (Auto.) 3.73 8,500 lbs.* (3 859 kg) 4.10 10,500lbs.**(4767kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg). **Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 Ibs. (4 540 kg). 4-49 C-3500 (2WD) Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. 5.7L 4.10 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 4.56 9,000 lbs. (4086 kg) 4.10 8,000 lbs. ( 3 632 kg) 6.5L Diesel 7.4L 4.10 10,500 lbs.* (4 767 kg) 4.56 12,500 lbs.* (5 675 kg) *Fifth wheel hitchrating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540kg). 4-50 K-3500 (4WD) Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. 5.7L 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 6.5LDiesel 4.10 7,500 lbs. ( 3 405 kg) 7.4L 4.10 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg) 4.56 12,000 lbs.* (5 448kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD) C-3500 Crew Cab (2WD) Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max.Trailer Wt. 5.7L 4.10 4.568,500 7,000 lbs. (3 kg)178 lbs. (3 859 kg) 6.5L Diesel 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 7.4L 4.10 10,500lbs.* (4767 kg) 4.56 12,500Ibs.* ( 5 675kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.TrailerWt. 4.10 5.7L 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) 4.56 6.5L Diesel 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 4.10 4.10 10,000 lbs.* (4 540 kg) 7.4L 4.56 12,000 lbs.* (5 448 kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). 4-51 C-3500 HD Chassis Cab Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. TrailerWt. 6.5L Diesel 7.4L 4.63 5.13 4.63 5.13 9,000 lbs. (4 086 kg) 10,OOO lbs.(4540kg) 12,000lbs.* (5448 kg) 12,000lbs.* (5 448 kg) *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg). You can ask yourdealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at theaddress listed in your Warranty and Owner AssistanceInformation Booklet. In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight of to measure becauseit affects the total or gross weight your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-52 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Tire Loading” inthe Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. A B Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and the bumper. If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. . If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and swaycontrol of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading andgood handling when you’re driving. 4-53 Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or’bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with yourrig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1,000lbs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only i f The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20 650 Wa) of pressure. The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes. 4-54 If everythmg checks outthis far, make the brake tapat the the fluid to the rear port on the master cylinder that sends brakes. But don’t use copper tubingfor this. If you do, it will bend and finally breakoff. Use steel brake tubing. Driving with a Trailer Towing atrailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig.Acquaint yourself withthe feel of handling and braking with the added weightof the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Making lbms Stay at least twice asfar behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoidsituations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. I NOTICE: Passing You’ll need more passingdistance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you. Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailerto come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. 4-55 ’hrn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn or lanechange. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer,the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs onthe trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down along or steep downgrade.If you don’tshift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they wouldget hot andno longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating. 4-56 If you havean automatic transmission, youcan tow in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@).You may want to shift the transmission toTHIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selectionif the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual transmissionand you are towing a trailer, it’sbetter not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear). When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider the following: Enginecoolant will boil at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferablyon level ground) with the automatic transmissionin PARK (P) (or the manual transmissionout of gear and the parking brake applied) for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If you do get the overheat warning,see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to doit: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet for anautomatic transmission, or into gear for a manual transmission. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or REVERSE (R) fora manual transmission. It can bedangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever isnot fully in PARK(P) with the parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you have four-wheeldrive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL(N), your vehicle will befree to roll, evenif your shift lever isin PARK (P). So, be sure the transfercase is ina drive gear not in NEUTRAL(N). -- 5 . If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case isin a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL (N). 6. Release the regular brakes. 4-57 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking ona Hill 1. Apply your regular brakesand hold the pedal down while you: Start your engine; Shift into a gear; and Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need servicemore often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake adjustment. Eachof these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4-58 Trailer Wiring Harness A seven-wire harness is stored under the rear end of your vehicle, between theframe rails. An electrical connector will need to be installed atthe trailer end of the harness, by a qualified electrical technician. For additional trailer wiring and towing information please consult your GM dealer. Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tapeor strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enoughso the wiring won’t bind or break when turning with the trailer, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatlyso it won’t be damaged. If you tow a trailer, your Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) may not be properly visible from behind.You should select a trailer with a CHMSL on it or, if one is not available, haveone installed. See your GM dealer about how to connect your vehicle’s wiringto a trailer CHMSL. Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. 1 NOTICE: Using a power winch withthe transmission in gear may damage the transmission. When operating a power winch, always leave the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling. Power Take-Off (PTO) (Manual Transmission) NOTICE: ~~ Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s or installer’s instructions. 1 NOTICE: Using a PTO while operating in one place before the vehicle has reached normal operating temperature candamage the transfer case or transmission. If you will be usingthe PTO while operating in one place,drive and warm up the vehicle before usingthe PTO. To engage a PTO: 1. Hold the clutch pedal down. 2. Set the parking brake. 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 4. Engage the PTO. If you have a PTO that will exceed 35 hp installed on your vehicle, it could damage the transfercase or transmission. When havinga PTO installed on your vehicle, make sure thatit will not exceed 35 hp. 4-59 3. Engage the PTO. NOTICE: 4. Shift the transmission into the gear you want. 5. Release the clutch as you normally would. When you Using aPTO for more than four hours without release the clutch, the PTO will start. driving your vehicle can damage the transfer case or transmission.If using a PTO for more than Using a Transfer CaseMounted Power four hours without driving your vehicle, drive Take-Off (Manual Transmission) your vehicle for a while to allow the transfer case 1. Hold the clutch pedal down. and transmission to cool. 2. Set the parking brake. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transfer case into the range you want (if you have four-wheel drive). Then shift the transmission into the gear you want, apply the regular brakesand release the parking brake. 5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you normally would. Whenyou release the clutch, the PTO will start. To engage a PTO while thevehicle is moving: 1. Hold the clutch pedal down. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 4-60 3. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N). 4. If the vehicle will remain in thesame place, shift the transmission into the highest gear. 5. Engage the PTO. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into thegear you want. Then shift the transfer case into the rangeyou want, apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. 6. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes)as you normally would. Whenyou release the clutch, the PTO will start. Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off (Automatic Transmission) 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition off. 3. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N). 4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 5. Engage the PTO. If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transfer case into the range you want. Turn the ignition to START. Then apply the regular brakes and release the parking brake. Step-Bumper Pad If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, itmay be equipped with a rear step pad at the centerof the bumper. If you will be using the bumper to tow a trailer, you must remove the center cutout circle to install the trailer ball. You must also remove both outer cutouts to attach the trailer safety chains. 6. Shift the transmission to THIRD (3) to start the PTO. 7. Release the regular brakes to drive the vehicle. Disengaging a Power Take-OFF 1. Turn the ignition off. 2. Put the transmission in PARK (P). To remove the pad, lift the edge of the pad from the rear of the bumper and swing it forward. When the pad releasesfrom the 3. Release the PTO 4. Restart the engine. 4-61 & 4-62 NOTES Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur onthe road. 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-8 5-1 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices Jump Starting Towing Your Vehicle Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine) 5- 13 5-2 1 5-2 1 5-22 5-34 Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button at the top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key isin, and even if the key isn’tin. To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first click and release. Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off. But they won’t flashif you’re braking. 5-2 When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery (or batteries) hasrun down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. But please usethe following steps to do it safely. I NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your vehicle warranty. Don’t try to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it. This could damage yourvehicle, even if you have a manual transmission. And if you have an automatic transmission, won’t it start thatway. 1 A CAUTION: Batteries can hurtyou. They canbe dangerous because: 0 They contain acid that can burn you. 0 They contain gas that can explode ignite. or 0 They contain enough electricity to burnyou. If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things canhurt you. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative groundsystem. I NOTICE: r ~~~ ~ ~~~~ If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. 5-3 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but besure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmlyon both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL(N). If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not inNEUTRAL (N). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets. Turnoff all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio! 5-4 NOTICE: If you leave your radioon, it could be badly damaged. The repairswouldn’t be coveredby your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. - - I If your vehicle has air conditioning, the au .iary electric fan under the hood can start upeven when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan. A CAUTON: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the batterieshave enough water. You don’t need to add water to the Delco Freedom@ battery (or batteries) installed in everynew GM vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, besure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add of that first. If you don’t, water to take care explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water andget medical help immediately. Check that thejumper cables don’t have looseor missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shol The vehicles could bedamaged too. * Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybeother parts too. I ’ACAUT’DN: Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from moving parts once the engines are running. 5-5 5 . Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 5-6 6. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive(+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle hasone. 1 7. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) cable. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery. 8. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile. 10. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 1 1. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. 1 I A. Heavy Metal EnginePart B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery Towing Your Vehicle Try to have yourGM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new, by adding such things as fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these instructions may not be correct. Before you do anything,turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towingservice: That your vehicle has rear-wheeldrive, or that it has the four-wheel-drive option. 0 The make, model and yearof your vehicle. 0 Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and transfercase, if you have one. 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. When the towing servicearrives, let the tow operator know that thismanual contains detailed towing instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to see them. L AC A .UmlON: To help avoid injury to you or others: Never let passengers ride in avehicle that is being towed. 0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. Never get under yourvehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck, Always use separate safety chains on each side when towinga vehicle. For pickups (except cab chassis models), use T-hookson frontof vehicle, J-hooks on rear. For cab chassismodels, use J-hooks on front and rearof vehicle. A CAUTION: A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn’t adequately secured. This can causecollision, a serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The vehicle should betightly secured with chains or steel cables before it is transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing,etc.) that canbe cut by sharp edges underneath thetowed vehicle. Don’t have your vehicle towed on thedrive wheels unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance restrictions later inthis section or your transmission will be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly. 5-9 Front Towing 4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or manual transmission in FIRST (1). 5 . Put the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). 6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the parking brake. 7. Maximum speed 55 mph (88 k d h ) , distance unlimited. If your vehicle isa two-wheel drive or a four-wheel drive with an electric shift transfercase, use the following directions: If your vehicle is four-wheeldrive with a manual transfer case, use the followingdirections: 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Engage the parking brake. 3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing service. (Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this.) 5-10 1. Turn the ignitionkey to the OFF position. 2. Engage the parking brake. 3. Clamp the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing service. (Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this.) 4. Put an automatic transmissionin NEUTRAL (N) or manual transmission in FIRST (1). 5 . Put the transfer case in 2HIGH (2HI). 6. When the vehicle is hooked up, release the parking brake. Maximum speed 35 mph (55 kmh), maximum distance 50 miles (80 km). Rear Towing NOTICE: .._. Towing pickup models from the rear while loaded with heavycargo may causethe frame side rails to flex sufficientlyto allow the pickup box to contact the cab and could causedamage to the cab and/orbox. Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engin You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Overheating” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. NOTICE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual or electric shift transfer case, a towing dolly must be used under thefront wheels or vehicle/powertrain damage w lioccur. 5-11 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine I If you keep drivingwhen your engineis overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or if others could be badly burned. Stop your engine it overheats, andget out of the vehicle untilthe engine iscool. NOTICE: A CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can you burn badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until itcools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou open thehood. CAUTION: (Continued) 5-12 If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot whenyou: Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. Cooling System-- Gasoline Engines When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see: 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a) for automatic transmissions. If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Justto be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn offthe engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Engine Fan(s) You may decide not to lift the hood but toget service help right away. 5-13 The coolant level should beat or above theCOLD mark. If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary electric fan under the hood can start upeven when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electricfan. If the coolant inside thecoolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. If it isn’t,you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system. Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed beforeyou drive thevehicle. I NOTICE: Engine damage from running your engine without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty. 5-14 If there seems to be noleak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Tank Gasoline Engines -- If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at or above the COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@ (silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.) I Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. CAUTION: (Continued) With plain wateror the wrong mix, your engil could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mix. 5-15 A CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank at is or above the COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling systemis cool before youdo it. 5-16 /d CAUTION: - - Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system canblow out and burnyou badly. They are underpressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out a t high speed. Neverturn the capwhen the cooling system,including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. -- -- 5-17 How to Add Coolantto the Radiator 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turningthe pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-18 3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. 4. Then fill the coolant recovery tankto the COLD mark. 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 5-19 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiatorhose getting hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s). 7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 5-20 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages. It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’redriving, especially if you maintain your tires properly.If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: You may also hear this fan noise whenyou start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages. If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction you’d use in a skid. In anyrear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle undercontrol by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 5-2 1 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turnon your hazard warning flashers. Changing a tire can cause an injury. vehicle The you or other can slip off the jack and roll over people. You and they could be badly injured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent thevehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brakefirmly. 2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever inPARK (P)or shift a manual transmission to FIRST(1) or REVERSE (R). 3. If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear not in NEUTRAL(N). 4. l b r n off the engine. CAUTION: (Continued) To be even more certain thevehicle won't move, you can put blocksa t the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tireon the other sideof the vehicle, a t the opposite end. d -- 5-22 The following steps will tellyou how to use the jack and change a tire. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Extended Cab Models 2 and &Door Models The equipment you’ll needis behind the passenger’s seat. Turn the wingnut counterclockwise and remove thejack cover, if there is one. Remove the jacking equipment. If you have a chassis cab, refer to the information from the body supplierhnstaller for the location of your spare tire. You’ll use the jack handle and the ratchet to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. 5-23 Follow these instructions tolower the spare tire: e>& u E F- A. Hoist Assembly B. Ratchet E. Valve Stem, Pointed Down C. Jack Handle E Spare Tire G . Retainer D. Hoist Shaft H. Hoist Cable 5-24 1. One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The other side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the ratchet to the hook nearthe end of the jack handle (as illustrated) with the DOWN markingfacing you. Insert the other end throughthe hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. spare tire to the ground. 2. Turn the ratchet to lower the Continue to turn the ratchet until thespare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. at 3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening. 4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. . .:.. . . . . . . . . . , L A . :.: . ... .. . .. ,._ i.:: r .. 1 1L -4 1 t ,., . ’,*, . . .. . . . .. ... . . . . . . . ,.. .? :I 4 , 1 The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the jack handle extension (B), the jack handle (C), the wheel wrench (D) and the ratchet (E). If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need the jack handle extension also. Attach thejack handle (andjack handle extension, if needed) to the jack. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, use the wheel wrench and ratchet to remove them. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise, with DOWN facing you, to remove the wheel nut caps. I With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you, rotate the ratchet clockwise. That will lift the jack head a little. Then take off the hubcap. If the wheel also has a trim ring, usethe wheel wrench to pry along the edge and remove it. If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the wheel wrench in the sloton thewheel and gently pry out. 5-26 Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire I. Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise, with DOWN facing you, to loosen the wheel nuts. Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet. 2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position thejack on the frame behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack on the rear axle between the spring and the shock absorber. jacked upis Getting undera vehicle when it is dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack,you could be badly injured killed. or Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. NOTICE: Front Position Rear Position Raising yourvehicle withthe jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack. Be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising yourvehicle. 5-27 4. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. Front Position Rear Position . With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle by rotatingthe ratchet andwheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the groundso there is enough roomfor the spare tire to fit. 5-28 5. Remove any rustor dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. Rust or dirton the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by hand using the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub. TION: I Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might comeloose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 5-29 8. Tighten the nuts f d y in a criss-cross sequence as shown by rotating the wheel wrench clockwise. Front Position Rear Position 7. Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-30 A C1 UTION: - Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could leadto an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sureto get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have the nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to the proper torque. See “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. I NOTICE: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. 9. Put the wheel trim back on. For vehicles with plastic wheel nut caps, tighten the caps until they are finger tight, then tighten them an additional one-half turn with the ratchet and wheel wrench. I Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools 1A CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these in the properplace. Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored. 5-31 For an underbody spare tire carrier, stow the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier. To store the tire: Lower Raise 1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down andto the rear. 2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. H U 3. Attach the ratchet, with theUP mark facing you, near the hook at the end of thejack handle. Insert the other end, on an angle, through the hole in therear bumper and into the hoistshaft. 4. Raise the tire fullyagainst the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until thereare two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tire hoist cannot be over-tightened. 5. Grasp and push againstthe tire to be sure it is stored securely anddoes not move. A. Hoist Assembly B. Ratchet C. Jack Handle D. Hoist Shaft E. Valve Stem, Pointed Down E Flat or Spare Tire G. Retainer H. Hoist Cable Return the jack, ratchet, wheel wrench and jack extensions to their location behind the passenger’s seat. Secure the items and replace the jack cover,if there isone. 5-32 *TB 2 and 4-DOOr Models A. Nut B. Jack E. Jack and Tool Storage Box C. Jack Handle Extension E Ratchet D. Wheel Wrench G . Jack Handle H. Tool Retainer Extended Cab Models A. Nut E Ratchet B. Jack and Tool Cover G . Wheel Wrench C . Jack Handle Extension H. Jack D. Tool Retainer I. Jack Handle E. Jack and Tool Storage Box 5-33 c If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don’t want todo when your vehicle is stuckis to spin your wheelstoo fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. F G Chassis Cab Models A. Nut B. Retainer E Jack and Tool Storage Box G. Ratchet C. Jack Handle Extension H. Jack Handle D. Jack Handle Extension I. Tool Retainer E. Wheel Wrench J. Jack 5-34 If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you o r others couldbe injured. And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 k h ) as shown on thespeedometer. NOTICE: Using the Recovery Hooks Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, youcan destroy your transmission. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your frontwheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooksif your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may need to usethem if you’re stuck off-road and need to be pulledto some place where you can continue driving. 5-35 The recovery hooks, when used, are undera lot of force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Never pull onthe hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from thechain or cable snapping back. I NOTICE: Never use the recovery hooksto tow the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged and itwould not be covered by warranty. 5-36 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care. 6-2 6- 3 6-4 6-5 6- 8 6- 14 6- 15 6- 19 6-2 1 6-25 6-26 6-26 6-27 6-29 6-32 6-32 Service Fuel (Gasoline Engine) Fuels in ForeignCountries - - Gasoline Engines Filling Your Tank Checking Things Under the Hood Noise Control System Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) Air Cleaner Filter (Gasoline Engines) Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid Hydraulic Clutch Rear Axle Four-wheel Drive Engine Coolant Radiator Pressure Cap (Gasoline Engine) Thermostat ’ 6-33 6-33 6-35 6-39 6-39 6-49 6-50 6-59 6-60 6- 64 6-68 6-69 6-70 6-75 6-76 6-78 Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Appearance Care Materials Chart Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Specifications Service Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supportedservice people. We hope you’ll want to keep yourGM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: n @ E b Demo Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work,you’ll want to getthe proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications”in the Index. 6-2 Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts andlist the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index. A 1: I ’ You can be injured ana yourvehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools beforeyou attempt anyvehicle maintenance task. Be sure touse the proper nuts,bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners canbe easily confused.If you use the wrong fasteners,parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.Check with your GM dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. Fuel (Gasoline Engine) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this. Use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines. Be sure the postedoctane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you still hear heavy knocking, yourengine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy,constant knock that means you have a problem. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it is designed tooperate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. 6-3 Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadlenyl manganese tricarbonyl (”T); ask your service station operator whether or nothis fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines.If fuels containingMMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lampon your instrument panel mayturn on. If this occurs, return to your authorizedGM dealer for service. To provide cleanerair, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent fuel system, deposits from forming in your engine and allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore,you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean theair. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier. . NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode NOTICE: (Continued) NOTICE: (Continued) metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. L Fuels in Foreign Countries-- Gasoline Engines If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the properfuel may be hard to find. Neveruse leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll bedriving. You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). General Motors International Product Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Filling Your Tank For vehicles equipped with the “VORTEC” 4300 engine, the fuelcap is located on the left side of your vehicle. For vehicles equipped with the “VORTEC” 5000,5700, 7400 and 6.5Lengines, the fuel capis located on the left side of your vehicle. On a chassis-cab model, refuel thefront tank first, or in instances when only a partial fuel fill is desired. An automatic transfer mechanism will maintain approximately equal fuel levels in both tanks, so no switching is required by the operator. A Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline. 6-5 While refueling vehicles equipped with the “VORTEC” 5000,5700, 7400 and 6.5L engines, hang the cap inside the fuel filler door. To take off the cap, turn it slowlyto the left (counterclockwise). While refueling vehicles equipped with the “VORTEC” 4300 engine, let the cap hang by the tether below the fuel filler neck. 6-6 A CAUTION: When you putthe cap back on, turn it to the right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. If you get gasoline on yourselfand then something ignitesit, you could be badlyburned. Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. I 3 NOTICE: If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system might be damaged. Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle” in theIndex. 6-7 Checking Things Under the Hood 'A CAUTI-N: - If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary engine fan under the hood can start up and injure you even whenthe engine is not running. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from any underhood electric fan. 6-8 'A CAUTION: Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These includeliquids like gasolineor diesel fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pullup on the secondary hood release, located just to the passenger’s side of the center of the grill. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly. 6-9 TORTEC” 4300,5000,5700 Engine When you lift up the hood you’ll see: “VORTEC” 5700 engine shown, locations for other engines similar. 6-10 A. Battery H. Fan B. Air Cleaner I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir C. Radiator Cap J. EngineOilFill D. Coolant Recovery Tank K. Brake Fluid Reservoir E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir F. Engine Oil Dipstick M. FuseRelay Center G . Automatic Transmission Dipstick 6-11 VORTEC" 7400 Engine 6-12 A. Battery H. Engine Oil Fill B. Coolant Recovery Tank I. Fan C. Air Cleaner J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir D. Radiator Cap E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator K. Brake Fluid Reservoir L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir F. Engine Oil Dipstick M. FuseRelay Center G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick 6-13 Noise Control System The following information relatesto compliance with Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,OOO lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in your Warranty booklet. These standhrds apply onlyto vehicles sold in the United States. Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below. Insulation: Removal of the noise shields or unaernood insulation. Engine: Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. Fan and Drive: Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering clutch inoperative. Tampering With Noise Control System Prohibited Federal law prohibits thefollowing acts or the causing thereof: 1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any newvehicle for the purpose of noise control, priorto its sale ordelivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use;or 2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design has been removedor rendered inoperative by any person. Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped). Air Intake: Removal of the air cleaner silencer. Reversing the air cleaner cover. Exhaust: 0 Removal of the muffler and/or resonator. 0 Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps. Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) Checking Engine Oil If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil (Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. When to Add Oil The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located on the passenger’s side of the engine. If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. Turn off the engineand give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 6-15 I NOTICE: I Don’t addtoo much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. The engine oil fill cap for the “VORTEC” 4300, 5000 and 5700 engines are located on the driver’s side engine valve cover. What Kind of Oil to Use Oils recommendedfor your vehicle can be identifiedby looking for the “Starburst”symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure theoil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. The engine oil fill cap for the “VORTEC” 7400 engine is located at the front of the engine. Be sure to fill it enoughto put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. 6-16 You should also use the proper viscosity oilfor your vehicle, as shown in the following chart: . RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSln GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BESTFUELECONOMYANDCOLDSTARTING,SELECTTHE LOWEST SAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. HOT WEATHER ( 7 E +loo- + aot t 60 - ~ 4 0 t 20 - 0- u)oK FOR THIS SYMBOL + 27 :1 /:. .___I NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not coveredby your warranty. . +3a - As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going to be 0°F (- 18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29”C),consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. SAE 3w-30 PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DONOTUSESAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6-17 Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you, use the shorttripkity maintenance schedule: 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. 0 Most trips includeextensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). 0 You operate your vehicle industy areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer. 0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application. Driving under theseconditions causes engine oil to break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever occurs first. 6-18 If none of them is true,use the long triphighway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months-- whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highwayconditions causes engine oil to break down slower. What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to theenvironment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’tever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer,a service station or a local recycling center for help. Air Cleaner (Gasoline Engines) The air cleaner assembly has an indicator that lets you know when the air filter is dirty and needs to be serviced. The indicator is located in the air intake tube between the air cleaner and the engine. See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Indexto determine when to check the indicator. Your air cleaner is located between the battery and coolant recovery tank. If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is green, no air filter service is required. When the area inside the indicator isorange and CHANGE AIR FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced. 6-19 To remove the air filter, unhook the retaining clips and remove the cover.Lift the filter and the connectedduct out of the air cleaner housing. Hold the ductand remove the filter by both pulling andtwisting the filter away from the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. Install the duct and the filterinto the air cleaner housing. Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing. Clean thefilter sealing surfaceof the duct and the filter housing. After the air filter is properly serviced, the indicator should be reset. Push the button on top of the indicator to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone. 6-20 Install the new filter by pushing it all the wayto the stop on the duct. Install the cover and fasten thetwo retaining clips. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index. Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. Ifit isn’t there, and the engine backfires,you could beburned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine withthe air cleaner off. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or if the vehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions: 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 I NOTICE: ~~~~~ If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600 and you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 6-21 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Service Department. Checking Transmission Fluid Hot If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could geta false reading on the dipstick. Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than50°F ( 1O"C), drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steadyfor 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures. NOTICE: ~~ ~~~~ ~~ Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving: When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). Checking Transmission FluidCold A cold check is madeafter the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more withthe engine off and is used only as a reference. Letthe engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Shouldthe fluid level be low during acold check, you must perform a hotcheck before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level. At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. 6-22 - Checking the Fluid Hot or Cold 0 Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 0 With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). 0 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 1. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel. 2 . Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 6-23 Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level upto the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove@ll. NOTICE: We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label is made especiallyfor your automatic transmission. Damage caused by fluid other thanDEXRON-I11 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be inthe COLDarea for a cold check or in theHOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check. 4. If the fluid level is inthe acceptable range, push the dipstick backin all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. How to Add Fluid Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-24 0 After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “Howto Check.” When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dimtick in place. Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing. Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked ona level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case. Then, follow these steps: How to Check Because this operation can bea little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your GM dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your of transmission. Too much can mean that some the fluid could comeout and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Check that the lubricant levelis up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and besure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps. 6-25 How to Add Fluid When to Check and What to Use Here’s how to add fluid. Referto the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluidto use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule, Owner Checks and Services, to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index. 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at thefiller plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluidlevel up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be surethe plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch system In your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slightamount of play (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal. It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check The proper fluid should be addedif the level does not reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it’s inplace in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. Rear Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 6-26 How to Check Lubricant C3 (3500 HD) Trucks Equipped with Dana Rear Axle Additional rear axle scheduled maintenance is required on 3500 HD models equipped with Dana rear axles when they are driven under the following conditions: Extreme loading (at or near GVWR) or trailer towing, and: Operation above 45 mph (70 k m h ) for extended periods of time. Vehicles used in any of these conditions require the rear axle lubricant be changed every 30,000 miles (50 OOO km). Fluid capacity is4.12 quarts (3.9 L). Four-wheel Drive If the level is below the bottomof the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, theyhave two additional systems that need lubrication. What to Use Transfer Case Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-27 How to Check Lubricant Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled MaintenanceServices” in the Index. How to Check Lubricant If the level is below thebottom of thefiller plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of thefiller plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricantto use. See “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Index. 6-28 t *<:- If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. If the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A 50/50 mixture of water and the proper coolant for your vehicle will: If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole. Give boiling protection up to 265 “F (1 29°C). 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Protect against rust and corrosion. What toUse Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new DEX-COOL@engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL@ extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning gages work as they should. NOTICE: When adding coolant, it is important thatyou use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free)coolant. If coolant other thanDEX-COOL’ is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolantwill require change sooner at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused bythe use of coolant other thanDEX-COOL’ is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. -- 6-29 What to Use NOTICE: Use a mixture of one-halfclean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. ‘A CAIJTION: I Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water andDEX-COOL’ coolant. L 6-30 If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat andbe badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your mix can freeze warranty. Too much water in the and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other partsIf you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check yourcooling system. I NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve thesystem. These can be harmful. Checking Coolant Adding Coolant If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Checking Coolant” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL’ coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank. /;1 CAUTION: I I Tu ~ ~ J tk radial pres re cap when the engine and radiator arehot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burnyou badly. With the coolant recoverytank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator arehot. -9 9- ~ ~~~~~ Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it. The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger’s side at the rear corner of the engine compartment. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD mark, or a little higher. When yourengine is warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark, or a little higher. A CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. 6-31 Radiator Pressure Cap (Gasoline Engine) NOTICE: Your radiator cap is a15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlledby a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installedwith the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflowtube on the radiator filler neck. 6-32 When you replace your thermostat, anAC' thermostat is recommended. Power Steering Fluid How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrewthe cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FWLL COLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. 6-33 Adding Washer Fluid NOTICE: 0 Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. 0 - .- - When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system.Also, water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansionif freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tankif it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. - - A CAUTION: - If you have too much brake fluid,can it spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.You or others couldbe burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. There areonly two reasons why the brakefluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When newlinings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index. 6-35 Checking Brake Fluid What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part No. 12377967). Usenew brake fluid from a sealed container only. @ Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. I You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look atthe window on the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. After workis done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure the level is above MIN and below the top of the window. 6-36 With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even workat all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. NOTICE: 0 0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage a few brake system parts. For example, just drops of minerallbased oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care”in the Index. Brake Wear If you have a C 3500 HD model, it has four-wheel disc brakes without wearindicators. If you ever hear a brake rubbing noise, have the brake linings inspected. Disc brake pads (except C 3500 HD models) have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedalfirmly). r The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. NOTICE: r ~~~~~ ~~~~~ Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads could result incostly brake repair. If your pickup is not a C 3500 HD model, it has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. 6-37 Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes arefirst applied or lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessaryto help prevent brake pulsation. When tiresare rotated, inspect brake pads for wear andevenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications. If you have rear drumbrakes, they don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brakelinings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tiresare removed for rotation or changing. When you have thefront brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets. See “Brake System Inspection’’ in Section7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.” Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signof brake trouble. 6-38 Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop, yourdisc brakes adjust for wear. If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applyingthe brakes a few times. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modernvehicle is complex. Its many parts haveto be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle isto have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. Whenyou replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you haveto have new ones put in -- be sure you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come toexpect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Bulb Replacement Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, werecommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and theengine isn’t running. See “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use. Vehicle Storage Halogen Bulbs IA If you’re not going to drive your vehicle25for days or more, take off the black, negative(-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. I I A CAUTION: CAUTION: H a l o g e n a v e G can burst if you drop orscratch thebulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. d l Batteries have acidthat can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” inthe Index for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature’’ in the Index. 6-39 Headlamps 3. Unplug and remove the headlamp. Sealed Beam Lamps Remove the four screws from the headlamp retainer. I 4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it in place. 5 . Install the retainer to the headlamp and tighten the screws. 2. Puli the headlamp out and remove the retainer. 6-40 Composite Headlamps 4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it to the right until it is tight. 2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out. 3. Unplug the electrical connector. 6. Plug in the electrical connector. 7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the two screws. 6-41 Front f i r n Signal Lamps (Sealed Beam Headlamps) 1. Remove the two screws . .: . : . .. at the insideedge of the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly. I:? .. 5 . Push in gently on the bulb, turn itcounterclockwise and remove it from the socket. 2. Remove the lamp assembly by swinging it out from the inside edge and sliding it out at theoutside edge. 3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while turning the socket counterclockwise. 6. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently pressin on the bulb and turn itto the right untilit is tight. 7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn it to the right until it locks. 8. Put the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly back into the vehicle and tighten thescrews. 6-42 Front Turn Signal Lamps (Composite Headlamps) 3. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly. 1. Remove the screws and take out the parkingkurn signal lamp assembly. 4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise and remove it from the socket. 2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while turning the socketcounterclockwise. 5. Put the new bulb into the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight. 6. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn it to the right until it locks. 7. Put the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly back into the vehicle and tighten thescrews. 6-43 Fender Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheel Pickup Models) 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in untilit is tight. 5 . Put the socket back into the lens assembly and turn it clockwise to tighten it. 6. Replace the lens and tightenthe screws. 6-44 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. Sidemarker Lamps 1. Remove the screws and pull out the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly. 4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in untilit is tight. 2. Reach through the opening and turn the sidemarker bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Put the socket back into the sidemarker assembly and turn it clockwise to tighten it. 6. Replace the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly and tighten the screws. 6-45 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the screws and lift off the lens. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. 2. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket. 6-46 Roof Marker Lamps 1. Remove the screws and lift off the lens. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in unf :il it is tight. 2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly. 4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. Tailgate Marker Lamps 1. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the lensbulb assembly from the lens holder. 2. Unplug the lensbulb assembly at the connector wire. 3. Plug in a new lensbulb assembly and push the connector wire into the hole in the tailgate. 4. Snap the lensbulb assembly into the lens holder. 3. Remove the screws from the bulb retainer and take it off the lamp assembly. Taillamps (Pickup Models) 1. Open the tailgate. 6-47 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket. Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models) 1. Using your hands, peel the rubberseal away from the lens. 2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly. 5. Put in a new bulband push it in until it is tight. 6. Replace the bulb retainer. 7. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws. 8. Close the tailgate, 6-48 3. Slide the socket out of the lamp assembly. 4. Pushingently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise and remove it from the socket. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement For proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index. To replace the windshield wiper bladeassembly: 5. Put in a new bulb and, pushing in gently, turn it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Put the socket back in the lamp assembly and replace the lens and lens seal. 1. Lift the wiper arm and rotate theblade until it is facing away from the windshield. 2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. 3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2. 6-49 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details. I 0 0 Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a resultof too much friction. You could havea n air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued) L 6-50 Underinflated tirespose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or brokenby a sudden impact such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. If your Worn, old tires can cause accidents. tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. -- 0 Inflation -- Tire Pressure The Certificationflire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads. On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflationpressures for atypical reduced load are printed on the Improved Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door. Weigh the vehicle to find the load on eachtire and see the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for that load. NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not.your If tires don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can get the following: 0 Too much flexing 0 Too much heat 0 Tire overloading 0 Badwear Bad handling Bad fuel economy. If your tires have too muchair (overinflation), you can get the following: 0 Unusualwear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards. 6-51 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated evenwhen they’re underinflated. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. FRT FRT Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soonas possible and check wheel alignment. Also checkfor damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Timefor New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see “Dual Tire Operation” laterin this section. 6-52 If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your tires. If your vehicle has front tireswith different load ranges or tread designs (such as all season vs. odoff road) than the rear tires, don’t rotate your tiresfront to rear. If your vehicle has dual rear II If your vehicle has dual rear wheels andthe load range and tread design for your front tires is the same as your rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your tires. wheels and the load range or tread designfor your front tires is different from your rear tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating your tires. The dual tires are rotated as apair, and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires. When you install dual wheels, besure the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each sideare lined up. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the CertificationRire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 6-53 A When It’s Timefor New Tires C i ‘JTION: Rust or dirton a w b J , or on the parts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become loose off and cause after a time. The wheel could come an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirtfrom places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,to get allthe rust or dirtoff. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” inthe Index.) 6-54 One way to tell when it’s time for new tiresis to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cordor fabric. The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location of the damage. Dual Tire Operation Buying New Tires When the vehicle is new, or whenevera wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheelnut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. To find out what kind and size oftires you need, look at the Certificationnirelabel. The outer tireon a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire.Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically. If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding 5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires.Be sure to return to the recommended pressures when no longer driving under those conditions. See “Changinga Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. A CAUTION: The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get newtires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. Thatway your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speed rating andconstruction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. If you operate your vehicle witha tire that is badly underinflaw, the tire can overheat. An overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all tires (including the spare, if any) are properly inflated. 6-55 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tiresof different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tireson all wheels. Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tiresby treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. 6-56 While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucksmay vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate. Traction -- A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature -- A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wearor your vehicle pulling one way or the other, thealignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheelnuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your GM dealer if any ofthese conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sureto have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. 6-57 See “Changing a Flat Tire” in theIndex for more information. A CAUTION: - - - Used Replnn?mnnt Wheels Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on yourvehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou lose control.You could havea collision in which Always use the you or others could be injured. correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. I NOTICE: ~~ ~~ The wrongwheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer o r odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tireor tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. Whenever a wheel, wheel boltor wheel nut is replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles ( 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 6-58 A CALJTION: Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel. Tire Chains I NOTICE: ~~ If your vehicle has dualwheels or P265/75R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance. NOTICE: (Continued) NOTICE: (Continued) Use another type of traction device onlyif its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tiresize combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the reartires. If you don’t have dualwheels or if you have a tire size other thanP265/75R16, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rearaxle. Don’t use chains on the tires of the frontaxle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the chains contacting yourvehicle, stop andretighten them. If’the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle. Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’recleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: 0 Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride 0 Acetone 0 Paint Thinner 0 Turpentine Lacquer Thinner NailPolish Remover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 6-59 Don’t use anyof these unless this manualsays you can. In many uses, these willdamage your vehicle: Alcohol Laundry Soap 4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. 5 . If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. Bleach Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric ReducingAgents 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaneroften to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. Your GM dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They willclean normal spots and stains very well.Do not use them on vinyl or leather. Here are some cleaning tips: 1. Always read the instructions on thecleaner label. 2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. 3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and changeto a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitchor welt lines. 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label. . 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 6 . Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge. 7. Wipe off what’s left witha slightly damp paper towel or cloth. 8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer. 9. Wipe with a clean cloth. 6-60 Using Solvent-’Qpe Cleaner on Fabric Fabric Protection First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap. Your vehicle has upholstery andcarpet that has been treated with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to keep it looking new. If you need to use a solvent: 1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife or scraper. 2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167). Special Cleaning Problems 3. Keep changing to a clean section of the cloth. Greasy or Oily Stains 4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring. Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve them and maycause them to spread. 6-61 l I ~ Non-Greasy Stainc Cleaning Vinyl Stains caused by caIsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows: Use warm water anda clean cloth. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area withcool water. 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. ' Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more thanonce. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish willstain if you don't get themoff quickly. Usea clean cloth anda vinyVleather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Cleaning Leather 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heatto dry. 4. If needed, clean lightly withsolvent-type cleaner. For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Combination Stains Stains caused by candy, icecream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Clean with cool water and allowto dry. Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately.If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. 3. If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner. 6-62 ~~ Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean anAdry. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If’you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Glass Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may haveto be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, anelectric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license shouldnot be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is notclear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper bladechatters when running, wax, sap orother material may beon the blade or windshield. Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ (non-scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011 or equivalent. The windshield is cleanif beads do not form when you rinse it with water. Grime from the windshield will stickto the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshiel washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades andclean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. 6-63 Weatherstrips Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, andnot stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease witha clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.) Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow the instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish orcar washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t usecleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaning agents should beflushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and waterspotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Finish Care Occasional waxingor mild polishing of your vehicleby hand may be necessaryto remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Your GM manufactured vehicle may havea “basecoatjclearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatjclearcoat paint finish. NOTICE: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishingon a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dullthe finish or leave swirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Aluminum or Chrome Wheels (If Equipped) Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehiclegaraged or covered whenever possible. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on thembecause you could damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with wateris all that is usually needed. However, youmay use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse withclean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry witha soft clean towel. A wax may then beapplied. Don’t take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to highpolish, is recommended for all bright metalparts. 6-65 Tires Sheet Metal Damage To clean your tires,use a stiff brush witha tire cleaner. If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. I NOTICE: I When applying a tire dressing always take care to Finish Damage wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. quickly and may developinto a major repairexpense. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish. Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paintshop. 6-66 Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosenedbefore being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. This applies only to materials manufactured and soldby General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment not made or sold by General Motors are not covered. 6-67 Appearance Care Materials Chart I I1 I PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE 994954 1050004 2.75 1050172 16 1050173 16 1050174 23 in. xin. 25 sq. ft. oz. (0.473 L) oz. (0.473 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 1050200 1050214 1050427 23 1052870 1052918** 1052925 1052929 1052930 12345002”” 12345725 1 (3.785 gal. L) 32 oz. (0.946 L) oz. (0.680 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 8 oz. (0.237 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 8 oz. (0.237 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 12 oz. (0.354 L) Polishing Cloth - Wax Treated Chamois Tar and Road Oil Remover Chrome Cleaner and Polish White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish Vinyl Cleaner Glass Cleaner Wash and Wax Concentrate Armor All Protector Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner Wheel Cleaner Capture Dry Spot Remover Armor All TM Cleaner Silicone Shine Tire Exterior Polish Shines vehicle without scratching Also removes old waxes and polishes Removes rust and corrosion Removes soil and black marks Exterior cleaner and polish Spot and stain removal Cleans grease, grime and smokefilm Exterior wash Protects vinyl, leather and rubber Cleans vinyl, cloth, tires and mats Spray on wheel cleaner Attracts and absorbs soils Cleans vinyl, leather and rubber Shines tires I TM I I2377964 II 16 oz. (0.473 L) II Cleaning Wax I2377966 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. See “Fluids andLubricants’’ in theIndex. 6-68 I I Y I I Protects finish removes and scratches fine I I Spot cleans paint and gives high luster **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: f 1 E N G l N E A 7 MODEL YEAR CODE ASSEMBLY PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. 0 yourVIN, 0 themodel designation, 0 paint information and 0 a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. 6-69 Electrical System Headlamps Add-on Electrical Equipment The headlamp wiringis protected by an internal circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away. I NOTICE: Windshield Wipers Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment from working as can keep other components they should. Power Windows and Other Power Options Your vehicle has anair bag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away. 6-70 The windshield wiper motor is protectedby a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical Dr( em and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. Instrument Panel Fuse Block The fuse block access door is on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block. You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between yourthumb and index finger and pull straight out. You may have spare fuses located behind thefuse block access door. These can be used to replacea bad fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage. 6-71 Ir; FuseKircuit Breaker 4 D FuseKircuit Brc 2 3 10 Usage Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer, CHMSL, Hazard Lamps, Stoplamps Transfer Case Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Domemeading Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, Power Mirrors 11 12 13 14 Usage Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay, Lamp Switch, Keyless Entry, Low Coolant Module, Illuminated Entry Module, DRAC (Diesel Engine) Not Used Cruise Control Auxiliary Power Outlet Air Bag System License Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps, RoofMarker Lamps, Tailgate Lamps, Front Sidemarkers, Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch Illumination, Fender Lamps, Headlamp Switch Illumination Air Bag System Wiper Motor, WasherPump NC, A/C Blower, High Blower Relay Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock Relay,Power Lumbar Seat 4WD Indicator, Cluster, Comfort Controls, Instrument Switches, Radio Illumination, Chime Module FuseKircuit Usage Breaker 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A B Underhood Fuse/Relay Center DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay Front and Rear Turn Signals, Back-up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid Radio (Ignition) 4WALNCM, ABS, Cruise Control Radio (Battery) PRNDL, Automatic Transmission, Speedometer, Check Gages Warning Light Variable Effort Steering Not Used Not Used Front Axle, 4WD Indicator Lamp, TP2 Relay (Gasoline Engine) Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, Keyless Entry Module Power Windows The underhood fusehelay center is located in the rear of the engine compartment near the brake fluid reservoir. Move the retainer clips for the cover to access the fuse block. You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 6-73 Name Usage FUEL SOL GLOW PLUG HORN AUX FAN ECM- 1 A/C ENG- 1 Fuel Solenoid (Diesel Engine) Glow plugs (Diesel Engine) Horn, Underhood Lamps Auxiliary Fan Injectors, PCMNCM Air Conditioning Ignition Switch, EGR, Canister Purge, EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid, Heated 0 2 , Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine), Water Sensor (Diesel Engine) Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch, Fog and Courtesy Fuses Battery, Fuse Block Busbar Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Module Hi Blower Relay Stoplamps LIGHTING Name ECM-B RR DEFOG IGN-E 6-74 Usage Fuel Pump, PCMNCM Rear Window Defogger Auxiliary Fan RelayCoil, A/C Compressor Relay, Hot Fuel Module, Dual Tanks BATT IGN-A IGN-B ABS BLOWER STOP/HAZ Replacement Bulbs Quantity Exterior Lamps Sealed Beam Headlamps Composite Low-Beam 2 Headlamps Composite High-Beam Headlamps Front Marker Lamp Front Parking and Turn Lamp Rear Parking Lamp Rear Stop and Turn Lamp Back-up Lamp Fender Marker Lamp Roof Marker Lamp License Plate Lamp Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Underhood Lamp Underhood Reel Lamp 2 Number H6054 9006 2 9005 2 4 194 2357NA 2 2 3057 3057 Interior Lamps Dome Lamps Reading Lamps Door Courtesy Lamps Four-Wheel-Drive Jndicator ,Four-Wheel-Drive Shift Lever Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp Ashtray Lamp Sunshade Vanity Mirror Quantity 2 2 2 1 Number 211-2 21 1-2 194 194 1 194 1 194 L 194 74 3156 194 194 194 92 1 1 1 93 232 6-75 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information. Engine “VORTEC” 4300 “VORTEC” 5000 “VORTEC” 5700 “VORTEC” 7400 QPe V6 V8 V8 V8 VIN Code W M R J Spark Plug Gap 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) Wheels and Tires Model C 1500 K 1500 and C/K 2500 C/K 2500 (w/C6P) C/K 3500 (Single Rear Wheels) C/K 3500 (Dual RearWheels) C 3500HD Front C 3500HD Rear Tire Pressure 6-76 Description 5 bolts ( 14mm) 140 lb-ft (190 N-m) 140 lb-ft ( 190 N-m) 6 bolts (14mm) 140 lb-ft (190 N-m) 8 bolts (14mm) 140 lb-ft (190 N-m) 8 bolts (14mm) 140 Ib-ft ( 1 90 Nsm) 8 bolts (14mm) 5 bolts (5/8 in.) 175 lb-ft (240 N-m) 10 bolts (5/8in.) 175 lb-ft (240 Nam) See the Certificationnire label on the rear edgeof the driver’s door or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab. Torque Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as thepart used in your vehicle whenit was built, or if you have anyquestions, please contact your GM truck dealer. These specifications are for information only. If you have anyquestions, see the service manual for the chassis or refer to the bodymanufacturer's publications. VIN Code Oil Filter* Air Cleaner Filter* PCV Valve* Spark Plugs* Fuel Filter* Wiper Blades** Wiper Blade Type Wiper Blade Length w M R J PF52 A 1300C CV746C 4 1-932 GF626 22154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF1218T A 1300C CV796C 4 1-932 GF626 22 154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF1218T A 1300C CV796C 4 1-932 GF626 22154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) PF1218 A1300C cv774c 41 -932 GF626 22154886 Trico 18 inches (45.0 cm) *AC part number **GM part number ?Use a PF52 oil filter if your vehicle has four-wheel drive. 6-77 Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) After refill, the level must be rechecked.See “Cooling System” in the Index. Engine “VORTEC” 4300 “VORTEC” 5000 “VORTEC” 5700 “VORTEC” 7400 “VORTEC” 7400 w/3500 HD VIN W M R J J Quantity 13 quarts (12.3 L) 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) 25 quarts (23.5 L) 28.5 quarts (27 L) After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. VIN w M R J QuantitywithFilter? quarts 4.5 (4.3 L) 5 quarts (4.8 L) 5 quarts (4.8 L) 7 quarts (6.5 L) ?Oil filter should be changed at every oil change. *Add one additional quart (.946L) for C-3500HD Models. 6-78 Type Short Bed Long Bed Standard Crew Cab Chassis-Cab Side Tank Chassis-Cab Rear Tank 3500 HD Models Side Tank 3500 HD Models Rear Tank Quantity 26 gallons (98 L) 34 gallons (128 L) 34 gallons (128 L) 22 gallons (83 L) 18 gallons (68 L) 22 gallons (83L) 18 gallons (68 L) Air Conditioning Refrigerants Crankcase Capacity (Approximate) Engine “VORTEC” 4300 “VORTEC” 5000 “VORTEC” 5700” “VORTEC” 7400” Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate) Not all airconditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning systemin your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer. See the refrigerant charge label under the hoodfor information regarding refrigerant capacity. Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safetv. dependability and emission control performance. 7-2 7-4 7-7 7-3 1 Introduction Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Long Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 7-45 7-49 7-5 1 7-54 Part B: Owner Checks and Services Part C:Periodic Maintenance Inspections Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Part E: MaintenanceRecord 7-1 Introduction IMPORTANT: Your Vehicle and the Environment KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER -€VEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED ' Plan Have youpurchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your GM dealer for details. 7-2 Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenancecan even affect the qualityof the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflationcan increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehiclein good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: “Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good conditi “Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows what to havedone and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessaryequipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your GM dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can jobs, you can be dangerous. In trying to do some be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the propertools and equipmentfor the job. If you have anydoubt, have a qualified technician do the work. “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehiclefor warranty repairs. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether youdo the work yourself or have it done. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 7-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. These schedules are for vehicles that: Using Your Maintenance Schedule carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s Certificationire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off-Road Driving WithYour Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index. Because of all the different wayspeople use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehiclein good condition, see your GM dealer. 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Selecting the Right Schedule First you’ll needto decide which of thetwo schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s howto decide which schedule to follow: you should This part tells you the maintenance services have done and when you shouldschedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supportedservice people will perform the work using genuineGM parts. Gasoline engine vehicles and diesel engine vehicles have different maintenance requirements.If you have a diesel engine, follow a schedule designated for diesel engine vehicles only. The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedPain rt D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All See the Diesel EngineSupplement for diesel engine maintenance schedules. Maintenance Schedule Short TripKity Definition -- Gasoline Engines Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). 0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off-road frequently. 0 You frequently tow a trailer. 0 If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application. One of the reasonsyou should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under anyof these conditionsis that these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooneE Short Trip/City Intervals -- Gasoline Engines Every 3,000 Miles (5000 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs fEst). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). -- Short TripKity Intervals Gasoline Engines Every 6,000 Miles(10 000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and Underhood Insulation Inspection(GVWR above 8,500 lbs. only). Front Wheel Bearing Repack(2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or driven under severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles(100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Every 150,000 Miles(240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. ' f -3 Maintenance Schedule Follow this maintenanceschedule only if none of the conditions from the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing, drivenin a dusty area or used off paved roads. Use the ShortTripKity schedule for these conditions. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under to break highway conditions causes engine oil down slower. I Long Tripmighway Intervals-- Gasoline Engines Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Shields and Underhood insulation Inspection (GVWRabove 8,500 lbs. only). 7-6 Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transmission Service (vehiclesover 8600 GVWR or driven under severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Inspection. Evaporative Control Systeminspection. Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection. Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals onlysunzrnarize maintenance services. Be sure tofidlow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. -- Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (1 66 000 km) should be performedafter 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” following. Footnotes 3- The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the # Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperatureis 10°F (- 12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule. California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perfom this maintenance item willnot nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded. 7-7 I -- Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines 1 3,000 Miles (5 000 km) ** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the Index for proper lubricant touse): 0 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer,drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every oilchange. If driving in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km). Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. (See footnote **.) a More frequent lubrication may be required for heavy-duty or off-road use. 0 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme overloadtrailer towing conditions and high-speed (above 45 mph or 70 km/h) conditions for extended periods of time must have the drive axle fluid changed every 30,000 miles (50 OOO km). See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in this section. 7-8 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) 9,000 Miles (15000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An, Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and fluid as needed. Check constant velocity axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .) joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY:^ 7-9 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-= Gasoline Engines 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand fluid as needed. Check constant velocity axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.) joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-10 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: (p/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean 0Change engine oil and filter (or every and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 17 Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission 3 months, whichever occurs first). Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) SERVICED BY: 7-11 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation Dattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) L DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE I- SERVICED BY: Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 27,000 Miles (45 000 km) 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote * *.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote? .) Y ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: (Continued) 7-13 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued) 33,000 Miles (55000 km) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above8,500 lbs. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE DATE 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 7-14 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: ~~~ (ShortipKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) (See footnote #.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0.Check readfront axle fluid level and add Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation fluid as needed. Check constant velocity pattern and additional information. joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote +.) (See footnote **.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-15 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 1 42,000 Miles (70 000 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or e\ter?J 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. ( S e e footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE 7-16 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for -damageor looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) Check readfront axle fluid level andadd fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule == Gasoline Engines I 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. - I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluiddoesn’t require change. DATE 7-18 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote * * .) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfi-ont axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote** .) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-19 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 57,000 Miles (95 000 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or ever)J 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whicheveroccurs first). I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE lSERVICED BkI I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in the United States. 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection as described in the service manual. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote"f) 0Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly (if equipped). Replace as needed. An Emission Control Service.(See footnote "f .) Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?,) 0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-21 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-22 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE ISERVICED BY I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfiont axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: J. 7-23 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -= Gasoline Engines I 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add 3 months, whichever occurs first). fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 17 Vehicles With GVWRAbove 8,500 Ibs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). Control Service. Applicable only tu vehicles sold in the United States. DATE 7-24 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. a Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ** .) DATE 7-26 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ** .) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote”f) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-27 I -- Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines I 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect spark plug wires. 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Replace spark plugs. CI Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. SERVICED BY: (Continued) 7-29 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. lfyou do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and filter donot require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. An Emission Control Service. DATE 7-30 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I == Gasoline Engines I 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines L The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles ( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles (I66 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km). See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” following. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule. ** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use): 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refillat first engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check fluid level andadd fluid as needed. 0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add fluid as needed at every engine oil change. 0 3500 HD Models withapplications requiring high-speed (above 45 mph or 70 km/h) operation for extended periods of time must have thedrive axle fluid changed every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). Footnotes The US.Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed be recorded. at the indicated intervals and the maintenance # Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline center splines, front axle propshaft splines and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin bushings should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (- 12”C) or higher, or they could be damaged. 7-31 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) ~~ DATE 7-32 ~ ~ ACTUAL MILEAGE ~~~~ ~ ~~ SERVICED B Y Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is LZ Noise Emission Control Service. Applicnhle only to vehicles sold in the United Stcrtes. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE I 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ~SERWCEDBY: I 7-33 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote+.) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United Stcrtes. DATE ACTUAL 7-34 MILEAGE SERVICED B Y Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or e:very 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) c]Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) (Continued) 7-35 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) (Continued) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. 0Change automatic transmission fluid Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emissiorz Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold irz the United States. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 7-36 and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90 O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you donot use your vehicle under any qf these conditions, the fluid and-filterdo not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 17 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for lealung. (See footnote **.) Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-37 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). [7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 7-38 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace fuel filter.A n Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 17 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. A n Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) 0Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every system inspection as described in the service manual. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Conduct evaporative control system inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote T.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-39 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-40 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. A n Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote ** .) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.) 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first). (Continued) 7-41 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every (See footnote?.) 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. Only: Inspect shields and underhood insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is aNoise Emission 12 months, whichever occurs first). Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE 7-42 I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY:I An Emission Control Service. 0Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.) 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote * *.) 100,000 Miles (146 000 km) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR isover 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90 O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y (Continued) n A- / -43 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. - 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) c]Drain, flush and refillcooling system (or every 60 months since last service, Lfyou do not use your vehicle under any qf these conditions, the.fluid and,filter do not require changing. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Pcv)valve. An Emission Control Service. I R DATE A A I -44 I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I I whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressurecap. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Check the engine coolant level andadd the proper coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D. At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles (160,1600 and 10 000 km) Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washerfluid level in the windshield washer tank and add theproper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield WasherFluid” in the Index for further details. At Least Once a Month For vehicles with dual wheels,check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. Tire Inflation Check At Each Fuel Fill Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. I t is importantfor you or a service station attendant to pe$orm these underhood checks at eachjuelfill. Engine Oil Level Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See “Tires” in the Index for further details. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. 7-45 At Least Twice a Year restriction indicator more oftenif the vehicle is usedin dusty areas or under off road conditions. Restraint System Check Make sure the safety beltreminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wearor cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.Also see “Wiper Blades, Cleaning” in the Index. Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check Your vehicle has an indicatoron the engine that lets you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check indicator at least twicea year or when your oil is changed. See “Air Cleaner” in the Index for more information. Inspect yourair cleaner filter 7-46 Manual Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; addif needed. See “Manual Transmission” in the Index. Check the system for leaks. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed. Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level; addif needed, See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. Hydraulic Clutch System Check Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.See “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid”in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected and repaired atonce. At Least Oncea Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lockcylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D. Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all fuel doors, body hood and bodydoor hinges, tailgate and tailgate handle pivot points, latches, locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. 3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. On manual transmission vehicles, put theshift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed downall the way to the floor. If the starter works when theclutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service. Starter Switch Check A CAUTION: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. Ifit does, youor others could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake(see “Parking Brake” in the Indexif necessary) and the regular brake. NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check (Aut-matic Transm3on) I When you are doing this check, the vehicle could or others could be move suddenly. If it does, you injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface. - 7-47 2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary). Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK (P) Mechanism Check NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. Ifthe shift lever moves outof PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service. When you are doing this check, your vehicle You or others could be could begin to move. injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition keyto LOCK in each shift lever position. 0 With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P). With a manual transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is inREVERSE (R). Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your footon the regular brake, set the parking brake. 0 To check the parking brake’s holdingability: With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal.Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brakeonly. 0 To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes. On vehicles witha key release button, try to turn the key to LOCK without pressingthe button. The key should turn to LOCK only when you pressthe key button. On all vehicles,the key should come out only in LOCK. 7-48 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. Steering and Suspension Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection Inspect the hoses and havethem replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace anycables that have higheffort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Drive Axle Service Brake System Inspection Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and axle seals for leaking. Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake padsfor wear and rotors for surface condition. For vehicles withrear drum brakes, also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if yourdriving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) Inspection Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary. Oil the control lever pivotpoint and all exposed control linkage. Check vent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use. 7-50 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtainedfrom your GM dealer. USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see “Engine Oil” inthe Index. Engine Coolant 50/50mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench@DEX-COOL@ or Havoline@DEX-COOL@ coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index. USAGE Hydraulic Brake System FLUIDLUBRICANT Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). @ ~ Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GMPart No. 12345347 or equivalent System DOT-3 brake fluid). Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). Manual Transmission (5-Speed with Low Gear, RPO MW3) GM Goodwrench Synthetic Manual Transmission Gear Oil (GM Part NO.12346190 - 1 St.), Castrol Syntorq@LT or equivalent SAE 75W-90 GL-4 gear oil. 7-51 I USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission (GM Part No. 12345349 (5-Speed without or equivalent). Low Gear, RPO MG5) Automatic Transmission DEXR0N'-111 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2 Category LB or GC-LB. Chassis Lubrication 7-52 Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI ## 2, Category LB or GC-LB. USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. 105 1344or equivalent). Differential, Front and Rear Axle Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271) or SAE 80W-90 GL-5 Gear Lubricant. Differential, C3 (HD3500) Trucks With Dana Rear Axle SAE 75W- 140Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12346 140)or equivalent. Transfer Case DEXRON@-I11 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Windshield GM Washer Solvent Optikleen@Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 105 15 15) or equivalent. Propeller Shaft Chassis lubricant (GM Part SplineAJniversal No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Joint and lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB Propeller Shaft or GC-LB. USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI ## 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seat and Fuel Door Hinge Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT Tailgate Handle Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube’ (GM Part No. 12346241 Pivot Points, Hinges, Latch or equivalent). Bolt and Linkage Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). Weatherstrip Squeaks Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube’ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). See “Replacement Parts” in the Indexfor recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs. 7-53 Part E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes providedafter the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also,you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them. Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE MAINTENANCE SERVICED BY READING PERFORMED ~~ 7-54 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you neec1 assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects. 8-2 8-4 8-5 8-7 8-8 8-9 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program Canadian Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 8- 10 8- 10 8- 11 8-11 8-11 Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Customer Satisfaction Procedure Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date informationto promptly address any concerns you may have. However, if aconcern has not been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the following steps: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally,concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with theSales, Service or Parts Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. 8-2 STEP TWO -- If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). For help outside of the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135 (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 13 15 In other overseas locations, call GM International Product Center in Canada at: (905) 644-41 12. For prompt assistance,please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address,home and business telephone numbers Vehicle IdentificationNumber (This is available from the vehicleregistration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage 0 Nature of concern 0 0 0 We encourage you to call usso we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet, address your inquiry to: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, writeto: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Refer to your Warranty andOwner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices. When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that in the dealership, your concern will likely be resolved using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hardof hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user cancommunicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) ChevroletdGeo Roadside Assistance Program II II Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA ( 1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membership is free, however some services may incur costs. Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer, Basic Care and Courtesy” Care: Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA 0 Free towing for warranty repairs 0 Basic over-the-phone technical advice Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie., wrecker services, locksmithkey service, glass repair, etc .) To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. As theowner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo, membership in Roadside Assistance is free. 8-5 ROADSIDE Courtesy TM Cure PROVIDES: 0 Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above) Plus: 0 FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer from a legal roadway) 0 FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost on the roador locked inside) 0 FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road) 0 FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road) ChevroletlGeo offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers needing warrantyservice. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warrantyto eligible purchasers of 1997 ChevroletlGeo passengercar and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.) Note: Courtesy Cure is available to Retail and Retail Lease Customers operating 1997 and newer Chevrolet/Geo vehicles fora period of 3 years/36,OOO miles(60 O00 km), whichever occurs first. AllCourtesy Cure services must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer Service Management. Basic Care and Courtesy Cure are not part of or included in the coverage providedby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or discontinueBasic Cure and Courtesy Cure at any time. For complete program details, see your ChevroletlGeo dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure. The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services. For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to give to the advisor: Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure inside your owner information portfolio for full program details. Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchasedin Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 License plate number 0 Vehicle color 0 Vehicle location Telephone number where you can be reached 0 Vehiclemileage Description of problem a-7 Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warrantyto retail purchasers of 1997 Chevrolet/Geopassenger cars and light duty trucks (please see yourselling dealer for details). Courtesy Transportationincludes: 0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair completed during the same day. 0 0 0 Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,OR Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other transportation allowance in lieu of rentalfor any overnight warranty repair upto five days, OR Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieuof rental for any overnight warranty repair upto five days. Note: All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer service management. Claimamounts should reflect all actual costs. 8-8 Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part of the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time without notification. 0 For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer. Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet will reimburse upto $30/day for documented transportation you receive. For warranty repairs during theComplete Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, interim transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is available only in the UnitedStates and Canada. 0 In Canada, please consult yourGM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation. GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations andor to discontinue its participation in this program. Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has notbeen adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this sectionis very successful. There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.To assist in resolving these disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle automotive disputes. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statement of the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaintserving as an intermediary.If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled whereeligible customers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made. Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing aclaim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222- 1020. Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problems between you, yourdealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from theHotline. 8-10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live inCanada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario K l G 352 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, Michigan48007-7047 In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and pastmodel General Motors vehicles. The toll-free telephone number for orderinginformation in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATIO The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle canbe purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in withyour check, money order, to Helm, Incorporated (address below.) or credit card information CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO OWNER’S INFORMATION SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance electrical, steering, body, etc. Schedule for all models. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$90.00 TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the 1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 0.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. GI S H I P T 0 NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and alsothe name of the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent. Mail completed order form to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For purchases outsideU.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation. (CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION) (STREET ADDRESGNO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (STATE) DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. (ZIP CODE) 0 AREA CODE GM-CHE-ORD97 ‘(Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) b 8-14 NOTES Section 9 Index Accessory Power Outlet ......................... 2-61 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3 AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Adding Equipment ............................ 1-3 1 How Does it Restrain .......................... 1-28 How it Works ................................ 1-25 Location .................................... 1-25 ReadinessLight ......................... 1.25.2.67 Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 What Makes it Inflate .......................... 1-27 What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 When Should it Inflate ......................... 1-27 Air Bag Off Light .......................... 1.57. 2.68 Aircleaner .................................... 6-19 Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check . . . . . . . . 7-46 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ..................... 6-78 Alignment and Balance. Tire ...................... 6-57 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ...................... 6-65 Antenna ...................................... 3-26 Antifreeze ..................................... 6-29 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72. 4.7 Brakes ...................................... 4-7 Appearance Care ............................... 6-59 Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-68 Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Armrest Storage Compartment .................... 2-57 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Audio Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-24 Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Automatic Transmission 7-46 Check ...................................... Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Park Mechanism Check ........................ 7-48 Starting Your Engine .......................... 2-13 Axle. Front .................................... 6-28 Axle. Locking Rear ............................. 2-22 Axle.Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Jump Starting ................................. 5-3 Replacement.KeylessEntry ..................... 2-8 Warnings ................................ 5-3. 5-5 BBBAuto Line ................................. 8-9 Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Blizzard. Driving In ............................. 4-39 Brake 6-38 Adjustment .................................. 6-35 Fluid ....................................... 6-35 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Parking ..................................... PedalTravel ................................. 6-38 6-38 Replacing System Parts ........................ 2-7 I System Warning Light ......................... Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 6-37 Wear ....................................... 4-7 Brakes, Anti-Lock ............................... 4-6 Braking ........................................ 4-9 Braking in Emergencies ........................... 2-10 Break-In, NewVehicle .......................... 7-47 BTSICheck ................................... Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Canadian Roadside Assistance .................... 8-7 Capacities and Specifications ...................... 6-76 2-32. 4-40 Carbon Monoxide ......................... Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 2-47 CargoLamp ................................... Cassette Deck Service ........................... 7-45 Cassette Tape Player ........................ 3-9, 3- 12 Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Cassette/Compact Disc Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Center Overhead Console ........................ 2-52 Center Passenger Position ........................ 1-32 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 1 Certificationmire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 9-2 Chains.Safety ................................. 4-54 6-58 Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Changing a Flat Tire ............................. 2-69 Charging System Light .......................... 2-77 Check Gages Light .............................. Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 6-67 Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... 1-43 ChildRestraints ................................ Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . 1-48. 1-50 Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . 1-54. 1-57 1-47 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45. 1-46 Where to Put ........................... 6-65 Chrome Wheels. Cleaning ........................ 2-59 Cigarette Lighter ............................... Circuit Breakers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Cleaner.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Cleaning 6-65 Aluminum Wheels ............................ 6-64 Exterior Lampskenses ........................ Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 6-63 Glass ....................................... Inside of Your Vehicle ......................... 6-60 6-63 InstrumentPanel ............................. Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-64 Special Problems ............................. 6-61 6-61 Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Vinyl ....................................... 6-62 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 Climate Control System ....................... 3-2. 3-3 Clock. Setting the ................................ 3-7 Clutch Fluid. Hydraulic .......................... 6-26 3-2 Comfort Controls ................................ 1-40 ComfortGuides.Rear ........................... 3-26 Compact Disc Care ............................. 3- 16. 3-20 Compact Disc Player ....................... Compass. Rearview Mirror with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 2-55 Console Storage ................................ Control of a Vehicle .............................. 4-6 2-5 1 Convex Outside Mirror .......................... Coolant ........................................ 6-29 Heater. Engine ............................... 2- 14 RecoveryTank ............................... 5-15 5 - 13 Cooling System ................................ 8-8 Courtesy Transportation ........................... Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54, 2-55 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure .................... 6-66 Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Damage. Sheet Metal ............................ Daytime Running Lamps ......................... 2-44 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Defects.Reporting Safety ........................ 8-10 Defensive Driving ............................... 4-2 Defogger.RearWindow .......................... 3-6 Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-6 Dolby' B Noise Reduction ....................... 3-15 DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Door Locks ....................................... 2-5 Storage Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Third . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 2-21 Downshifting .................................. DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Driving 4-32 City ........................................ Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Drunken ..................................... 4-3 Freeway .................................... 4-33 4-14 Guidelines .................................. In a Blizzard ................................. 4-39 4-29 In the Rain .................................. 4-27 Night ...................................... 4-14 Off-Road ................................... OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 4-35 On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... OnSnowandIce ............................. 4-37 Throughwater ............................... 4-31 4-29 WetRoads .................................. Winter ...................................... 4-37 With a Trailer ................................ 4-54 DrunkenDriving ................................ 4-3 E a s y Entry Seat ................................ Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14.3.24. 1-7 6.70 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 6.10.6.12 Engine .................................. 6-29 Coolant ..................................... Coolant Heater ............................... 2- 14 7-45 Coolant Level Check .......................... Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 6-78 Cooling System Capacity ....................... 2-32 Exhaust ..................................... Fuse Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71.6.73 Manual Language 6-69 Identification ................................ OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45 5- 11 Overheating ................................. Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-76 StartingYour ................................ 2-13 Underhood Fusemelay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Pressure Gage ................................ 2-75 6-18 Used ....................................... Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Exhaust. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 6-60 Fabric Cleaning ............................... Fan Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. 3-3 Fender Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 9-4 6-19 Filter. Air ..................................... 6-64 Finish Care .................................... 6-66 Finish Damage ................................. 5-2 Flashers. Hazard Warning ......................... Flat Tire. Changing ............................. 5-22 Fluid Capacities ................................ 6-78 7-51 Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 2-45 FogLamps .................................... 6-4 Foreign Countries. Fuel ........................... 2-22. 6-27.. Four-wheel Drive ......................... ........................... 11 French FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 2-23 Front Axle Locking Feature ....................... 5-10 FrontTowing .................................. Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement ..... 6.42. 6-43 6-3 Fuel .......................................... FillingYourTank .............................. 6-5 Gage ....................................... 2-78 In ForeignCountries ........................... 6-4 Tankcapacity ............................... 6-78 6-71 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... FusibleLinks .................................. 6-71 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Engine Oil Pressure ........................... 2-75 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Speedometer ................................. 2-65 Tachometer .................................. 2-65 Voltmeter ................................... 2-70 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Gear Positions, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Gear Positions, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19, 2-20 2-52 GloveBox .................................... Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................ 4-41 4-41 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................... .. Guide Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-11 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Halogen Bulbs ................................ 6-39 5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 2-43 Headlamps .................................... 6-40, 6-41 Bulb Replacement ....................... 2-37 High/Low Beamchanger ...................... OnReminder ................................ 2-44 6-70 Wiring ..................................... Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 3-4 Heating ; ....................................... High-Beam Headlamps .......................... 2-37 Highway Hypnosis .............................. 4-35 Hill and Mountain Roads ......................... 4-35 Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Hood Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Release ...................................... 6-9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ........................... 6-26 Hydroplaning .................................. 4-3 1 Ignition Positions .............................. 2. 11 Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 2-46 Illuminated Entry ............................... Inflation. Tire .................................. 6-51 Inside DayiNight Rearview Mirror ................. 2-48 7-49 Inspections .................................... Brakesystem ................................ 7-50 Drive Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50 7-49 ExhaustSystems ............................. Radiator and Heater Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Steering .................................... 7-49 7-49 Suspension .................................. 7-49 Throttle Linkage .............................. Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Instrumentpanel ............................... 2-62 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63 2-64 Cluster ..................................... 6-71 FuseBlock .................................. 2-46 IntensityControl ............................. Interior Lamps ................................. 2-46 5-23 Jack. Tire .................................... Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 K e y Lock Cylinders Service ..................... Key Release Button ............................. Keyless Entry System ............................ Keys .......................................... 7-46 2-12 2-7 2-2 9-5 Labels 4-41 Certification ................................. Certificatioflire ............................. 4-4 1 Service Parts Identification ..................... 6-69 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 6-64 Cleaning .................................... 2-46 Dome ...................................... Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-29 Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Lights Air BagOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57, 2-68 Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25, 2-67 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............ 2-72, 4-7 Brake System Warning ......................... 2-71 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 CheckGages ................................ 2-77 Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Safety Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 10, 2-67 Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22,2-76 Loading Information, Truck-Camper ............... 4-43 Loading YourVehicle ........................... 4-41 Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . 4- 15 LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Locks Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Key Lock Cylinders Service ....................7-46 PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Rear Door Security .............................2-6 Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 7-47 Lubrication Service. Body ........................ 1-4 Lumbar Controls ................................ Maintenance. Normal Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54 Maintenance Schedule ............................7-1 Long TripMighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Long TripMghway Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 7-45 Owner Checks and Services ..................... Periodic Maintenance Inspections ................ 7-49 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-51 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 Short TripKity Definition ....................... 7-5 Short TripKity Intervals ........................ 7-5 Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 ManualMirror ................................. 2-51 Manual Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Shifting ................................ 2-19. 2-20 Starting Your Engine .......................... 2-13 Manualwindows ............................... 2-33 Memo Pad Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56. 2-58 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Mirrors ....................................... 2-48 Convex Outside .............................. 2-51 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 2-48 Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 2-51 Power Remote Control ......................... MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 vi ModelReference ................................. MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 N e w Vehicle Break-In .......................... 2-10 4-28 Nightvision ................................... 6-14 Noise Control System ........................... Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............. 6-77 Odometer .................................... 2-65 Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 4-14 Off-RoadDriving .............................. 4- 11 Off-Road Recovery ............................. Oil. Engine .................................... 6-15 Opener. GarageDoor ............................ 2-52 Overheating Engine ............................. 5- 11 7-45 Owner Checks and Services ....................... Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11. 8-12 P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................ Park. Shifting Into .............................. Park. Shifting Out of ............................ Parking AtNight .................................... 6-67 2-28 2-30 2-10 Brake ...................................... 2-27 7-48 Brake Mechanism Check ....................... 2-10 Lots ....................................... Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 With a Trailer ................................ 4-57 Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission .............. 2-31 Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49 Power 2-61 AccessoryOutlet ............................. 2-6 DoorLocks ................................... Driver’sSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 OptionFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-70 2-51 Remote Control Mirror ........................ . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 6-33 Steering Fluid ................................ 4-59 Take-0 ff .................................... Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-22 Problems on the Road ............................5-1 PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11, 8- 12 Radiator ..................................... 5-18 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32 3-23 Radio Reception ................................ Radios ........................................3-7 Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 ReadingLamps ................................ 2-46 9-7 . . . . . . . . I Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Axle ....................................... 6-26 RoofMarkerLampBulbReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 ........................... 2-6Rotation.Tires .................................6-52 DoorSecurityLocks Outside Seat Position ..................... 1-34. 1-37 Safety Belt Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 SeatPassengers .............................. 1-34 SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Towing ....................................: 5-11 1-15 Adults ...................................... WindowDefogger ............................. 3-6 ....................................... Care 6-63 RearSeat .................................. 1.8. 1-9 1-32 Center Passenger Position ...................... Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 1-43 .................................... Children Electrochromic Daymight ...................... 2-48 1-15 ............................... Driver Position Inside Daymight .............................2-48 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 How to Wear Properly ......................... 1-15 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 1- 17. 1-63. 1-64 IncorrectUsage .................... Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 1-32 LapBelt .................................... Recovery Tank. Coolant .......................... 5-15 1-15. 1-34. 1-37 Lap-Shoulder ...................... Refrigerants. Air Conditioning .................... 6-78 1-62 LargerChildren .............................. Replacement 1-23 ............................ Passenger Position Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39. 6-75 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Questions and Answers Parts ....................................... 6-77 Rear Comfort Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Wheel ...................................... 6-57 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . 1-34.1-37 Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 1-34 Rear Seat Passengers .......................... 8-10 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 110. 2-67 ReminderLight ......................... Restraints 1-65 Replacing After a Crash ........................ Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Child ....................................... 1-43 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Head ........................................ 1-6 Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 UseDuring Pregnancy ......................... 1-22 Systemcheck ................................ 7-46 Why They Work .............................. 1-11 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Roadside Assistance. Canadian ..................... 8-7 9-8 Safety Defects. Reporting ........................ 8- 10 ... 111 Safety Warnings and Symbols ....................... Scheduled Maintenance Services .................... 7-4 1-6 Seatback. Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seatbacks.Reclining ............................. 1-4 Seats 1-7 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Driver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Power Lumbar Control .......................... 1-4 Rear .................................... 1.8.1.9 1 .1 Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54. 1-57 Securing a Child Restraint . . 1.48.1.50.1.52. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.54. 1-57 6-2 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 1. 8. 12 Bulletins. Ordering ....................... EngineSoonLight ............................ 2-73 8- 11. 8. 12 Manuals. Ordering ....................... Parts Identification Label ....................... 6-69 Publications. Ordering .................... 8- 11. 8- 12 Work. Doing Your Own ......................... 6-2 Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6- 1 Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 1. 8.12 Service Publications ........................ 8- 11. 8. 12 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Shift Lever .......................... 2-1 5.2.19. 2.20 Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22. 2.76 2-21 Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Shifting. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19. 2.20 2-30 Shifting Out of Park (P) .......................... 1-16 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ..................... Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 2-37 SignalingTurns ................................ SIR .......................................... 1-23 4-13 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Sound Equipment. Adding ........................ 6-76 Specifications and Capacities ...................... Specifications.Engine ........................... 6-76 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 2-65 Speedometer ................................... 6-61 Stains. Cleaning ................................ 7-44 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Starting Your Engine ............................ 5-12 Steam ........................................ Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4-9 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4-9 VariableEffort ................................ Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Step-BumperPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 StorageAreas .................................. 2-52 Storage.Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Storage. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 2-54 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SupplementalInflatableRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 v Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tacho~eter .................................. 2-65 ............6-47 Tailgate Removal ................................ 2-3 Taillamp Bulb Replacement .................. 6-47. 6.48 Tailgate Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement Tape Player Care ............................... 3-25 Tempratwe Control. climate Contra1 System ..... 3-2. 3-3 Theft ... ; ...................................... 2-9 .......................... ................................ Theft-Deterrent Feature TlDJETLOcK" Themostat .................................... Third Door ..................................... Tilt Steering Wheel ............................. Time. Setting the ................................ Tire Chains .................................... Tire Loading ................................... Tires ......................................... and Balance ........................ Buying New ................................. Chains ..................................... ChaagingaFIat .............................. Cleaning .................................... Inflation .................................... Inflation Check ............................... Inspection and Rotation ........................ Loading .................................... Pressure .................................... Temperature ................................. Traction .................................... T E ~ W G ................................... K Uni€omQuality Grading ....................... War Indicatoa .............................. Alignmmt 3-21 3-21 6-32 2-4 2-36 3-7 6-58 4-41 6-50 6-57 6-55 6-58 5-22 6-66 6-51 7-45 6-52 4-41 6-51 6-57 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-54 Wheel Replacement ........................... 6-57 When It's Time for New ....................... 6-54 Topstrap ..................................... 1-47 Torque Lock ................................... 2-30 T~rgne.Whed Nut ......................... 5-30,6-76 Towing a Trailer ................................ 4-45 Towing Your Vehicle 5-8 Trailer 4-54 Brakes ..................................... Driving on Grades ............................ 4-56 Driving with ................................. 4-54 Hitches ..................................... 4-53 Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-58 Parking on Hills 4-57 Safety Chains ................................ 4-54 Tongue Weight ............................... 4-52 Total Weight on Tires .......................... 4-53 Tawing ..................................... 4-45 Turn Signals ................................. 4-56 Weight ..................................... 4-47 ~ringHarness............................... 4-58 Transfer Case. Electronic ......................... 2-25 Transfer Case LUbriG4Wlt .......................... 6-27 Transfer Case, Manual 2-23 Transmission Fluid Alltorntic ................................... 6-21 M ~ U ..................................... ~ I 6-25 Transmitters, Keyless Entry ........................ 2-7 Transportation, Courtesy .......................... 8-8 Trip Odometer ................................. 2-65 T N Users ..................................... 8-4 ............................. .............................. ........................... Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ................4-56 Underbody Maintenance ........................ Underhood Fusemelay Center ..................... 6-67 6-73 Vehicle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Damage Warnings .............................. iv Identification Number ......................... 6-69 Loading .................................... 4-41 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 . Visors. Sun .................................... 2-61 Voltmeter ..................................... 2-70 w a r n i n g Devices ............................... 5-3 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10 Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ 6-33 Washing Your Vehicle ........................... 6-64 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64 Wheel Alignment ..................................6-57 Nut Torque .............................5.30. 6.76 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 Wrench ..................................... 5-23 Windows ..................................... 2-33 LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Sliding Rear ................................. 2-35 Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Windshield Washer ............................. 2-39 Fluid .................................. 2.39.6.33 Fluid Level Check ............................ 7-45 Windshield Wipers .............................. 2-38 Blade Replacement ...................... 6.49.6.77 Cleaning the Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Winter Driving ................................. 4-37 Wiper Blades. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 Wiring. Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Wrench. Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Service Station Checkpoints ENGINE COOLANT RECOVERY TANK P5- 13 and 6-29* TI RES P6-50 BATTERY P5-3and 6-39 ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK SECONDARY HOOD RELEASE P6-9 WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID P6-33 I HOOD RELEASE P6-9 I FUEL DOOR P6-5 For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the Index in the back of the owner’s manual. * For vehicles equipped with diesel engines,see the Diesel Engine Supplement.